Owners Manual
2014 Journey
Journey
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
14JC49-126-AD
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t
drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a
friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on
this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never
drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfacLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
tion.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped on the right front door sill
under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .14 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .18
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .25
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .25
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .56
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .57
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .59
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .71
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
. . . . . .107
. . . . . .107
. . . . . .108
. . . . . .109
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .106
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa- method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
tion).
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
push to operate the ignition switch.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. The
emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
Emergency Key Removal
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and push
ignition button to place ignition in OFF position.
When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
CAUTION!
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authoReplacement Keys
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the is one that has never been programmed.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys- NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
performed at an authorized dealer.
and liftgate for unauthorized entry and the Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button for unauthorized operaGeneral Information
tion. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 switches for door locks are disabled. If something trigand with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is gers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide
subject to the following conditions:
the following audible and visible signals: the horn will
pulse, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in
• This device must accept any interference that may be the instrument cluster will flash.
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after 3 minutes, turn all of the visual signals off after
15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security
Alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information).
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ (refer to
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
further information).
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the • Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a valid
Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive entry door
handle (if equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in
⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
push the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle). disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
key to the ON position.
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
NOTE:
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
The interior lights will fade to off after approximately 30
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the position.
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering. NOTE:
Tamper Alert
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
(extreme bottom position).
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door or liftgate.
Security System Manual Override
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE
transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Flash Lights With Remote Key
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before Headlight Illumination On Approach
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Using The Panic Alarm
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights and turn signals
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior
lights will turn on.
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors (24 km/h) or greater
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, NOTE:
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your • The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
Instrument Panel” for further information.
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
other hand.
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Emergency Key Removal
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade 3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
the seal during removal.
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
Separating RKE Transmitter Case
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
General Information
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
maintaining security. The system has a range of
• This device must accept any interference received, includ- approximately 300 ft (91 m).
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal • Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
reduce this range.
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Vehicle Security Alarm not active
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the • Ignition in OFF position
engine will remote start:
WARNING!
• Shift lever in PARK
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
To Enter Remote Start Mode
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
Push and release the REMOTE START button on
the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds.
The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights
will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
NOTE:
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled
to the ON/RUN position.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP button.
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will display in
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
the EVIC until you push the START button.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the driver heated seat
feature will automatically turn on in cold weather. This
feature will stay on through the duration of remote start
or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Uconnect® system. For more
information on Remote Start Comfort System operation
refer to “Uconnect® Settings — Customer Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
2
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
Manual Door Lock Knob
upward.
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
If you push the power door lock switch, and any front
door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in
the vehicle. Removing the Key Fob or closing the door
will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and the
ignition is in the LOCK or ACC position, a chime will
sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
Power Door Lock Switch Location
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further Please see your authorized dealer for service.
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Auto Unlock On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
To Engage The Child-Protection Door Lock System
4. Any vehicle door is opened.
1. Open the rear door.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the
child lock control and rotate it to the LOCK position.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock System
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the
child lock control and rotate it to the UNLOCK
position.
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the lock knob up to the UNLOCK position, roll down
the window, and open the door with the outside
door handle.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
NOTE: After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower reLock system, always test the door from the inside to
sponse time.
make certain it is in the desired position.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds,
the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
security alarm.
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
NOTE:
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- door is unlocked.
ment Panel” for further information.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the
liftgate automatically.
NOTE: All doors and the liftgate will unlock when the
front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver
Door 1st Push” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Push”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handle
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Push” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s front
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Push” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Push”, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition is OFF.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
To Enter The Liftgate
2
Liftgate Unlock/Lock Button
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the button underneath the left
side of the accent bar, which is located on the liftgate
below the glass, to lock or unlock the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when prushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE:
WINDOWS
• After pushing the door handle LOCK button, you Power Windows
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This control all of the door windows.
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect® System,
the key protection described in ⬙Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter in
Vehicle⬙ remains active/functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Power Window Switches
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver’s power window switch has an Auto-down
feature. Push the window switch past the first detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoOn some models, the driver and front passenger power
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
window switches have an Auto-up feature. Pull the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
window switch up to the second detent, release, and the
window will go up automatically.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, pull the window switch
up to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury, be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers, and objects from the
window path before closing the window. Such entrapment may result in serious injury.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during Autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the down position). To enable the window controls, push
and release the window lockout button again (setting it in
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
the up position).
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
Reset Auto-Up
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window control on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button (setting it in
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Window Lockout Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
For further information on Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (PasWind buffeting can be described as the perception of pres- sive Entry), refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
sure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, NOTE: The liftgate cannot be unlocked or locked with
or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open the manual door lock plungers on the door trim panels or
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be mini- the door lock cylinder on the driver’s door.
mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
then open the front and rear windows together to minimize To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the handle and
the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, pull the liftgate toward you. Gas props will raise and
support the liftgate in the open position.
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
Wind Buffeting
LIFTGATE
NOTE:
The liftgate can be unlocked or locked pushing the UN- • In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
LOCK or LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
transmitter, the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry)
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftLOCK/UNLOCK button underneath the left side of the
gate trim panel.
accent bar, which is located on the liftgate below the glass or
by activating the power door lock switch located on either
front door trim panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, NOTE: Because the gas pressure drops with temperature,
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the
power liftgate functionality.
liftgate in cold weather.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. These fumes could
injure you and your passengers. Keep the liftgate
closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
blower switch on the climate control is set at high
speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.
Liftgate Release
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
positions
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located • All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs) or a cinching
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
latch plate, or both, which lock the seat belt webbing
restraint)
into position by extending the belt all the way out and
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain
a child seat or secure a large item in a seat — if
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
equipped
that span the front, second, and third row seating for
the driver and passengers seated next to a window
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride their arm.
buckled up in a rear seat.
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Lap/Shoulder Belts
WARNING! (Continued)
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
combination lap/shoulder belts.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
(Continued)
(Continued)
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is located on the pillar near the
Pulling Out Lap/Shoulder Belt
back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
necessary to make the belt go around your lap.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your
body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in
a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take
the force in a collision.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if
it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
belt in a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Removing Slack From Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have
been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat, the shoulder
belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the
belt away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it up
or down to the position that fits you best.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a
cinching latch plate which are used to secure a child
restraint system. For additional information, refer to
“Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt”
under the “Child Restraints” section. The chart below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
First Row
Second Row
Third Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
ALR
Center
N/A
Cinch
N/A
Passenger
ALR
ALR
ALR
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretena collision.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are These head restraints are passive, deployable compoequipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. identified by any markings, only through visual inspecThese devices may improve the performance of the seat tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
Energy Management Feature
pants, including those in child restraints.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may 1 — Head Restraint Front Half
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact. (Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
2
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision, 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
a comfortable position.
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle
then down to engage the locking mechanism.
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
AHR In Reset Position
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
NOTE:
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occuchecked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer. pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
notification.
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when the best way to keep the baby safe.
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers the force if there is a collision.
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
Seat Belt Extender
stowed.
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho- If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
deactivating BeltAlert®.
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate long enough. When it is not required, remove the exwhile the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with tender and store it.
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase
the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the seat
belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug
and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and
store the extender when not needed.
2
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2 — Knee Bolster
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
Advanced Air Bags.
air bags are located above the side windows and their
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
covers are labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB). The SABs are marked with
and type of collision.
an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
seats.
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon NOTE:
seat position.
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
but they will open during air bag deployment.
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
system components:
Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
• Air Bag Warning Light
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Knee Impact Bolsters
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
SAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect an
occupant during a side impact. The Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bag is marked with an air bag label
sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
Supplemental Side Curtain Air Bags
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down- NOTE:
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during
impacts that require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags and the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
work with the knee impact bolsters to provide improved
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
protection for the driver and front passenger.
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
child.
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
required for this vehicle.
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
Knee Impact Bolsters
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, Suppledriver and front passenger, and position the front occu- mental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and front seat belt
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front pretensioners, as required, depending on several factors,
including the severity and type of impact.
Air Bags.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain
frontal collisions depending on several factors, including
the severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air
Bags and the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are
not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Air Bags and the Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF position,
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light Inflator Units
comes on again after initial startup.
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation
rates are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and
folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the
full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20
milliseconds.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air Inflator Units
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a large quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully
inflates in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves
at a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items
are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates.
This especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC in
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
determining appropriate response to impact events.
If A Deployment Occurs
Enhanced Accident Response System
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or • The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
until the ignition is cycled to off.
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
• Unlock the doors automatically.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deHowever, if you haven’t healed significantly within a ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor bags will not be in place to protect you.
immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service Event Data Recorder (EDR)
the air bag system immediately.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
eight second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of are recorded. However, other parties, such as law entime, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
is designed to record such data as:
crash investigation.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
were buckled/fastened;
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
vehicle or the EDR.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Child Restraints
These data can help provide a better understanding of
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a United States, and every Canadian province, requires
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly NOTE:
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer
the rear seats rather than in the front.
to Transport Canada’s website for additional information:
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
• http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildren from newborn size to the child almost large
childsafety-index-53.htm
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
WARNING!
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat.
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has hold even an infant on your lap could become so
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety great that you could not hold the child, no matter
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardreach the highest weight or height allowed by their
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
convertible child seat.
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
WARNING!
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
Infants And Child Restraints
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Older Children And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
WARNING! (Continued)
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
NOTE: The second row bench with Integrated Child
Booster Seat must remain in the full rear position during
use.
2. Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and
seat cushion.
Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped
The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each outboard second-row passenger seat. The Booster Seat is
designed for children weighing between 48 and 85 lbs (22
and 39 kg) and between 47 in (119 cm) and 57 in (145 cm)
tall.
To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat
follow these steps:
1. Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to
use the Integrated Child Booster Seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Release Loop
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in the 4. Place the child upright in the seat with their back
booster seat position.
firmly against the seatback.
5. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
6. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary
to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s lap.
NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on
the hips and as snug as possible.
7. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Booster Seat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING!
Securely lock the seat cushion into position before
using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will not provide
the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers.
An improperly latched seat cushion could cause
serious injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
Proper Belt Use
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
8. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward on simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
the shoulder portion of the seat belt.
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
buckle.
the vehicle seat?
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
way back?
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
correctly.
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether
Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations
(Third Row Shown – If Equipped)
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
•
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint LATCH Positions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
No
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
The head restraints in the second row are
removable.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Latch Anchorages
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
In addition, there are tether strap anchors lo- Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
cated behind each rear seatback, near to the anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
floor.
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
Center Seat LATCH
Tether Strap Anchors
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear
seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard
position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D
and E are used for the left outboard position behind the
driver (3). Anchorages B and C are used for the center
seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint using anchorages C and D. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH
system at the same time. If you are installing three child anchorages in this vehicle:
restraints, you must use the seatbelt to install the center
1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):
child restraint. You can use either the LATCH anchors for
Install the child seats in the right and left outboard
positions (1) and (3) or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing
seating positions using lower anchorages A and B, and
the child seats in the outboard positions.
D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the
child seats do not block the center seat belt webbing
and buckle, the center seat belt can be used to restraint
an occupant or child restraint in the center seating
position.
2. Left outboard and center seating positions (3 and 2):
Install the first child seat in the left outboard seating
position using lower anchorages D and E. Install the
second child seat using the center anchorages, B and C.
Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the opposite
door, A. Do not use the remaining right outboard
seating position (1) for any occupant. The center child
restraint will block the seat belt buckle for this position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use anchorages B and C to install a LATCHcompatible child restraint in the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint using anchorages C and D. This is
not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
• A child restraint installed in the center position (2)
will block the seat belt buckle for the empty right
outboard seating position (1). Do not use this seat
for another occupant.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint.
• If you are installing three child restraints next to
each other, you must use the seat belt and the center
tether anchor for the center position. You can then
use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat
belt for installing the child seats in the outboard
positions. Please refer to “Installing the LATCHCompatible Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autoing position.
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt
following the instructions below. See the section “Install- 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
ing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direcwhat type of seat belt each seating position has.
tions to attach a tether anchor.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
in any direction.
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
WARNING!
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”
2
Third Row Shown – If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
Yes
Yes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
The head restraints in the second row are
removable.
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint.
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click”.
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
attach a tether anchor.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
more room for the car seat.
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The
Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
Seat Track Release Lever
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriAn unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
mental and should be avoided.
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses high-quality energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your VeA long break-in period is not required for the engine and
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
Transporting Pets
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
SAFETY TIPS
WARNING! (Continued)
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• On seven passenger models, do not drive the
vehicle with the second row passenger seat in the
easy entry/exit position (seat cushion flipped upward and seat moved forward), as this position is
only intended for entering and exiting the third
row seats. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
• On seven passenger models, do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat with the second row
seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the passenger
could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should turn on and remain on for
four to six seconds as a bulb check when the
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
not lit during starting, or if the light stays on,
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
flickers, or turns on while driving, have the system
system.
checked by an authorized dealer.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Defroster
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Seat Belts
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Floor Mat Safety Information
WARNING! (Continued)
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects
can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 䡵 Uconnect® PHONE (4.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Uconnect® 4.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .119
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . .122
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Manual Folding Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . .123
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .123
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N) . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Uconnect® 8.4/8.4Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . .200
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Recliner Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
䡵 VOICE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Uconnect® Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Third Row Passenger Seats — Seven Passenger
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ 60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats . . . . .214
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
▫ 50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats With
Fold-Flat Feature — Seven Passenger Models . .221
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .223
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .226
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . .
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . .
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .231
. . . . . .232
. . . . . .232
. . . . . .233
. . . . . .235
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .236
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .247
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .248
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .249
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Touchscreen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
▫ Interior Observation Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped . . . . . . .255
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .256
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .257
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .261
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .273
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .265
▫ Power Inverter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner . . .282
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight — If Equipped . . . . . .284
▫ Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Cargo Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Storage — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . .
▫ Second-Row Passenger Seat Temporary
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
▫ Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery
Retainers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. . . .290
. . . .290
. . . .292
. . . .293
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
Automatic
Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Models Without Express Window Feature
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door Press the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right)
trim panel.
and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the
mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
Models With Express Window Feature
Press and release the mirror select button marked L (left)
or R (right) and then press one of the four arrow buttons
to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
The selection times out after 30 seconds of inactivity in
order to guard against accidentally changing a mirror
position following an adjustment.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Power Mirror Switches
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
Resetting the Power Folding Outside Mirrors
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to the normal driving position.
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph • The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speeds.
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
will automatically unfold.
by pressing the button. (This may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Manual Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions:
forward, rearward and normal.
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
Uconnect® Phone supports the following features:
This feature allows for additional flexibility in position- Voice Activated Features:
ing the visor to block out the sun.
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mo1. Fold down the sun visor.
bile” or, “Dial 248-555-1212”)
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”)
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to • Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
extend it.
Back”)
Uconnect® PHONE (4.3)
Uconnect® 4.3
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,”
“Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show
Recent Calls”)
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone alSmith Mobile”)
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Screen Activated Features:
For Uconnect® Customer Support:
• Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen
• U.S. residents – visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
1-877-855-8400.
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis• Canadian Residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com
played on the touchscreen
or call, 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
(French).
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen
If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs
you may not be able to use any Uconnect® Phone
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device via the features. Refer to your mobile service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
touchscreen
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
to connect to them quickly
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
microphone for private conversation.
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used with
the system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
Uconnect® Phone Button
Button is used to
The Uconnect® Phone
enter the phone mode and make calls, show
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phoneThe Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
book etc., When you press the button you will
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other without Uconnect® Voice Command Button
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no
Button is
The Uconnect® Voice Command
matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse,
only used for “barge in” and when you are
pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The
make another call.
Uconnect® Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehi- • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
prompt.
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
switch), if so equipped.
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
Operation
“John Smith” and then “mobile,” the following compound command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile.”
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
compound command form of the voice command is
Uconnect® Phone prompts. There are two general methgiven. You can also break the commands into parts and
ods for how Voice Command works:
say each part of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound command form
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith movoice command “Search for John Smith,” or you can
bile.”
break the compound command form into two voice
commands: “Search Contact” and when asked “John
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone works
guide you to complete the task.
best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
guided through the available options.
from you.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses a Natural requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pressing the
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
button on your steering wheel.
“Voice Command”
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
Voice Command Tree
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
Help Command
would like to.”
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly the beep.
Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply press
button on your steering wheel and say a comprovides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who the
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was mand or say “help.” All Uconnect® Phone sessions begin
button on the radio control head.
with a press of the
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
Natural Speech
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Cancel Command
NOTE:
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and • You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
you will be returned to the main menu.
complete this procedure.
or
button on your steering • The vehicle must be in PARK.
You can also push the
wheel when the system is listening for a command and
1. You can do either of the following:
be returned to the main or previous menu.
a. Press the SETTINGS hard-key, page down to the
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
“Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key, press it and you will
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
see the Paired Phones screen. If there are no paired
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
phones you will see <Empty> as the first device name.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
b. Press the MORE hard-key, then press the “Phone”
soft-key and you will go to the Uconnect® Phone
main screen. Press the “Settings” soft-key. If there
are no phones currently paired a pop-up will
appear. If you select Yes you will go the Paired
Phones screen, if you select No you will return to
the Uconnect® Phone main menu.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. At the Paired Phones screen press the “Add Device” 5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled Audio Device. When prompted on the device,
soft-key and a pop-up with instructions will appear.
select the “Uconnect®” device and enter the PIN.
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, 6. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting.
select the “Uconnect®” device and enter the PIN.
4. When the pairing process has successfully completed, 7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make
this device the highest priority. This device will take
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired devices within range.
precedence over other paired phones within range.
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the PLAYER hard-key to begin.
2. Touch the “Source” soft-key.
NOTE: If No is selected, device priority is determined by
the order in which it was paired. The latest device paired
will have the higher priority.
3. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
You can also use the following VR command to bring up
a list of paired audio devices.
4. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
• “Show Paired Audio Devices.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the SETTINGS hard-key.
Uconnect® Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within 2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
range. If you need to choose a particular Phone or Audio 3. Select the Phone or Audio Device.
Device follow these steps:
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Disconnect
1. Press the SETTINGS hard-key.
Device” soft-key.
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
5. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
3. Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Phone/ Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
Audio” soft-key and then an Audio Device.
1. Press the SETTINGS hard-key.
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Connect
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
Device” soft-key.
3. Select the Phone or Audio Device.
5. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Delete Device” soft-key.
5. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Press the SETTINGS hard-key.
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect®
website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
follow the procedure in the “VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS” section.
3. Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the
currently connected device.
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Make Favorphone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for
ite” soft-key; you will see the chosen device move to
example, after you start the vehicle.
the top of the list.
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
5. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect® Phone.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, • Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available,
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
the previously downloaded phonebook is available for
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book
use.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile 3. Once Emergency is touched, the “Edit” soft-key appears. Touch the “Edit” soft-key and you will be given
phone is accessible.
the choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be 4. Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the task.
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transPhone Call Features
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
The following features can be accessed through the
phone connection.
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
Emergency And Towing Assistance
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
The 911/Help numbers can only be altered. These can not plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
be deleted or the names can not be changed.
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
To change the 911/Help number follow these steps.
1. Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.
2. Touch the “911/Help” soft-key. Touch the appropriate
listing to alter, Emergency for example.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Dial By Saying A Number
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call 1. Press the
button to begin.
with Uconnect® Phone.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
• Redial
say “Dial 248-555-1212.”
• Dial by touching in the number
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial 248-555-1212.
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Number, Call by Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back)
1. Push the “Phone”
button on your steering wheel to
• Mobile Phonebook
begin.
• Recent Call Log
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
done with one call or less active.
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Call Controls
Touch-Tone Number Entry
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call 1.
features:
2.
• Answer
3.
• End
4.
• Ignore
• Hold/unhold
Touch the “Phone” soft-key.
Touch the “Dial” soft-key.
The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
touch “Call.”
• Transfer the call to/from the phone
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press
button while in a call and say “1234#” or you
the
can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phonebook.
• Swap two active calls
Recent Calls
• Join two active calls together
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
• Mute/unmute
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Missed Calls
• All Calls
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
These can be accessed by touching the recent calls incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
soft-key on the Phone main screen.
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button and say “Show my mobile phone. Uconnect® Phone will then interrupt the
You can also press the
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls vehicle audio system, if on, and will display a pop-up
button
showing Answer, Ignore or Transfer. Press the
will be displayed.
to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”, call.
“Recent” or “Missed.”
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
Currently In Progress
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will display a pop-up showing Answer or
button on the
Ignore. Press the Answer soft-key or the
steering wheel to accept the call.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touching
the “Hold” soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial
a number from the dialpad, recent calls or from the
phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Join Calls” in this section.
switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
Also you can press the “Swap” soft-key on the Phone
main screen.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the “End”
button. Only the active call(s) will be
soft-key or the
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become
the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the
Toggling Between Calls
far end, a call on hold may not become active automatiIf two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
cally. This is cell phone-dependent.
button until you hear a single beep, indicatpress the
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Redial
Uconnect® Phone Features
1. Touch the “Redial” soft-key, or press the
button Emergency Assistance
and after the “Listening” prompt and the following If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
beep, say “Redial.”
reachable:
2. The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
was dialed from your mobile phone.
number for your area.
Call Continuation
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the operational, you may reach the emergency number as
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been follows:
switched to OFF.
button to begin,
• Press the
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
say “Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will inends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
struct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
and Mexico.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
NOTE:
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country If you need roadside/towing assistance:
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and • Press the
button to begin,
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assisarea.
tance.”
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
for the mobile phone directly.
(1-800-528-2069 for the U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for Canada,
55-14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outWARNING!
side Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage
Uconnect® Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has 24-Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
network coverage and stays connected to the
Voice Mail Calling
Uconnect® Phone.
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure, and
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to leave a number on a pager.
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phonesystem or an automated service, such as a paging service
book entry and/or Last Name as “Voice Password,” then
or automated customer service line. Some services reif you press the
button and say “Send Voicemail
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
Password,” the Uconnect® Phone will then send the
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
corresponding phone number associated with the phoneWhen calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that book entry, as tones over the phone.
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
NOTE:
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
button and say the word • The first number encountered for that contact will be
touchscreen or press the
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example,
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
ignored.
button and say, “Send 3 7 4
4 6 #), you can press the
6 #.” Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
Working With Automated Systems
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time Voice Response Length
out settings that are too short and may not allow the It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
use of this feature.
Detailed Voice Response Length.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by 1. Press the MORE hard-key, then touch the “Settings”
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth®.
soft-key.
These additional symbols will be ignored when dialing
2. Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to
a numbered sequence.
Voice Response Length.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box
The
button on the steering wheel can be used when
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
indicate your selection.
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “There are two numbers with the name John. Say Phone And Network Status Indicators
button on the Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you
the full name” you could press the
steering wheel and say, “John Smith” to select that option of your phone and network status when you are attemptwithout having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt. ing to make a phone call using Uconnect® Phone. The
status is given for network signal strength and phone
battery strength.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
WARNING!
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Chrysler Group LLC
strongly recommends that you use extreme caution
when using any device or feature that may take your
focus off the road or your hands off the steering
wheel. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use
of any handheld device while driving, encourage the
use of voice-operated systems when possible and
that you become aware of applicable laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth® mobile phone, the audio will be played through your
vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work
the same as if you dial the number using voice a
command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect® Phone simply touch the “Mute”
button on the Phone main screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- Voice Command
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
provide at least ½ inch (1 cm) gap between the
from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect®
overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
Phone or vice versa, press the “Transfer” button on the
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
you.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile • Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
Performance is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
• Fully closed windows
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
• Dry weather condition
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
NOTE:
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking • Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
in North American English, French, and Spanish acnumber combinations may not be supported.
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system such • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
Far End Audio Performance
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
• Audio quality is maximized under:
not in motion is recommended.
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
• Low Road Noise
Bluetooth® Communication Link
• Smooth Road Surface
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON mode.
• Fully Closed Windows
• Dry Weather Conditions
• Operation From The Driver’s Seat
Power-Up
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
not the Uconnect® Phone
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
• If your phone does not support phonebook download
or call log download over Bluetooth® than these
• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
commands will return a response that the contact does
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send a
not exist in the phonebook.
message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to for • Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
John Smith.
underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
NOTE:
• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or General Information
“Other.”
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
following conditions:
• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect® • Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
the party responsible for compliance could void the
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth®.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
• You can replace “4” with any message number shown
on the screen.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N)
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4Nav
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- • View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,”
“Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone alRecent Calls”).
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone.
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”).
Uconnect® Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features:
Screen Activated Features
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mo- • Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
bile” or, “Dial 248 555 1212”).
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks displayed on the touchscreen.
• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
• Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
Smith Mobile”).
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
SMS messages.
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
• Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
• Sending a text message via the touchscreen.
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device via the
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
touchscreen.
microphone for private conversation.
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
WARNING!
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly. Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicles
audio system; the system will automatically mute your
radio when using the Uconnect® Phone. For Uconnect®
customer support, visit the following website:
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in an accident
causing serious injury or death.
• U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
1-877-855-8400.
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
• Canadian residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
or call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 different electronic devices to connect to each other without
(French).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no
matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse,
pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and
has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The
Uconnect® Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio
devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used with
the system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
Uconnect® Voice Command Button
The Uconnect® Voice Command
button is
only used for “barge in” and when you are
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
make another call.
Uconnect® Phone Button
button is also used to access the Voice ComThe
mands for the Uconnect® Voice Command features if
your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect® Voice
Command section for direction on how to use the
button.
button is used to
The Uconnect® Phone
enter the phone mode and make calls, show
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phonebook etc., When you press the button you will
hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicles audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following comPhone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile.”
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect® Phone prompts. There are two general meth- • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
ods for how Voice Command works:
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mosay each part of the command when you are asked for
bile.”
it. For example, you can use the compound command
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
guide you to complete the task.
can break the compound command form into two
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
“John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone
guided through the available options.
works best when you talk in a normal conversational
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
meters away from you.
prompt.
Operation
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses a Natural requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pressing the
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
button on your steering wheel.
“Voice Command”
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
Voice Command Tree
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
Help Command
would like to.”
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly the beep.
Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply press
button on your steering wheel and say a comprovides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who the
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was mand or say “help.” All Uconnect® Phone sessions begin
button on the radio control head.
with a press of the
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
Natural Speech
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® webAt any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
you will be returned to the main menu.
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key on the screen to begin.
or
button on your steering
You can also push the
wheel when the system is listening for a command and 2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
be returned to the main or previous menu.
Cancel Command
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
NOTE:
• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your mobile
phone to complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Mobile Phone Pairing
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter
the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
• If “No” is selected, touch the “Settings” soft-key
from the Uconnect® Phone main screen.
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®
enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the
phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the
Uconnect® screen.
• See step 4 to complete the process.
Mobile Phone Pairing Progress
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in progress screen 5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
while the system is connecting.
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key from the Phone main
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
screen.
priority.
2. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en- the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, • “Show Paired Phones”
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect®
• “Connect My Phone”
screen.
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
while the system is connecting.
1. Touch the “Player” soft-key to begin.
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed, 2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make 3. Touch the “Bluetooth®” soft-key to display the Paired
Audio Devices screen.
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
4. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the You can also use the following VR command to bring up
system, a pop-up will appear.
a list of paired audio devices:
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en- • “Show Paired Phones”
abled audio device. When prompted on the device,
• “Connect My Phone”
enter the PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
6. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
Audio Device After Pairing
while the system is connecting.
Uconnect® Phone will automatically connect to the highest
7. When the pairing process has successfully completed, priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range. If
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not you need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device
this is your favorite device. Selecting “Yes” will make follow these steps:
this device the highest priority. This device will take
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key.
precedence over other paired devices within range.
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the 2. Touch the “Paired Phone” or “Paired Audio Source”
soft-key.
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher 3. Touch to select the particular Phone or the particular
priority.
Audio Device.
4. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key.
5. Touch the “Delete Device” soft-key.
2. Touch the “Paired Phone” or “Audio Device” soft-key. 6. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
3. Touch the “+” soft-key located to the right of the Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
device name.
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
5. Touch the “Disconnect Device” soft-key.
3. Touch the “+” soft-key located to the right of the
device name.
6. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key.
5. Touch the “Make Favorite” soft-key; you will see the
chosen device move to the top of the list.
2. Touch the “Pair Phone” or “Audio Device” soft-key.
3. Touch the “+” soft-key located to the right of the
device name for a different Phone or Audio Device
than the currently connected device.
6. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect® Phone.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text • Depending on the maximum number of entries downnames) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availBook Access Profile may support this feature. See
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availUconnect® website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported
able for use.
phones.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
phone is accessible.
follow the procedure in the “VOICE RECOGNITION
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
QUICK TIPS” section.
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transsupported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for
phone connection.
example, after you start the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
There are three ways you can add an entry to your
Favorite Phonebook.
1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the
phone main screen.
3
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Phonebook from the Phone main screen, then select the
appropriate number. Touch the + next to the selected
number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up
select “Add to Favorites.”
Phonebook Favorites
NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. From the Phone main screen, select Phonebook. From
the Phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key
and then select the “+” soft-key located to the right of
the phonebook record. Select an empty entry and
touch the + on that selected entry. When the Options
pop-up appears, touch “Add from Mobile.” You will
then be asked which contact and number to choose
from your mobile phonebook. When complete the
new favorite will be shown.
Add From Mobile
To Remove A Favorite
1. To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the
Phone main screen.
2. Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
then touch the + Options soft-key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3. Touch the + next to the Favorite you would like to Emergency And Towing Assistance
remove.
The Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers
can only be altered. These cannot be deleted and the
names cannot be changed.
To change the Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers
follow these steps.
1. Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.
2. Touch the “Favorites” soft-key. Scroll to the bottom of
the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Assistance
Favorites.
Remove From Favorites
3. Touch the + Options soft-key.
4. The Options pop-up will display, touch “Remove from 4. Touch the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
altered.
Favs.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan.
For example, if your mobile service plan provides threeway calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Emergency And Breakdown Assistance
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
with Uconnect® Phone.
5. The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose • Redial
between Editing the number or resetting the number • Dial by pressing in the number
to default.
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
• Favorites
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
• Mobile Phonebook
• Recent Call Log
• SMS Message Viewer
Dial By Saying A Number
1. Press the
button to begin,
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, •
say “Dial 151 1234 5555,”
•
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number 151-1234-5555.
•
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
•
1. Push the “Phone”
button on your steering wheel to
•
begin.
•
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
•
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
Answer
End
Ignore
Hold/unhold
Mute/unmute
Transfer the call to/from the phone
Swap two active calls
• Join two active calls together
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Touch-Tone Number Entry
Recent Calls
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key.
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
2. Touch the “Dial” soft-key.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
touch “Call.”
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press
button on your steering wheel while in a call
the
and say “Send 1234#” or you can say “Send Voicemail
Password” if Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phonebook.
Recent Calls
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
• Missed Calls
• All Calls
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
These can be accessed by touching the “recent calls” Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio syssoft-key on the Phone main screen.
button on your steering wheel to accept
tem. Press the
button and say “Show my the call. You can also touch the “answer” soft-key or
You can also press the
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls touch the caller ID box.
will be displayed.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
button and say “Show my Currently In Progress
You can also press the
recent calls” from any screen and the All calls screen will If a call is currently in progress and you have another
be displayed.
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,” call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button on the steering
mobile phone. Press the phone
“Recent” or “Missed.”
wheel, “answer” soft-key or caller ID box to place the
current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Toggling Between Calls
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
button on the steering wheel to
You can also press the
toggle between the active and held phone call.
You can place a call on hold by touching the “Hold”
soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial a number
from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Join Calls” in this section.
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
touch the “Swap” soft-key on the Phone main screen.
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Call Termination
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button
on
the
steering
wheel
or
the
“end”
soft-key.
Only
the
During an active call, touch the “Hold” soft-key on the
active
call(s)
will
be
terminated
and
if
there
is
a
call
on
Phone main screen.
hold, it will become the new active call.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Redial
Uconnect® Phone Features
Touch the “Redial” soft-key, or press the
and after the Emergency Assistance
“Listening” prompt and the following beep, say “ReIf you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
dial.”
reachable:
The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that was
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
dialed from your mobile phone.
number for your area.
Call Continuation
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the operational, you may reach the emergency number as
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been follows:
switched to OFF.
button to begin.
1. Press the
NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
system until the phone becomes out of range for the
say “Dial Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to touch the
instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
“transfer” soft-key when leaving the vehicle.
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
and Mexico.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Roadside Assistance / Towing Assistance
• The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the If you need roadside/towing assistance:
touchscreen.
button on the steering wheel to begin.
1. Press the
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country 2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing AssisCanada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
tance.”
be applicable with the available mobile service and area.
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
(1-800-528-2069 for the U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for Canada,
for the mobile phone directly.
55-14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler
WARNING!
Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
Uconnect® Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in 24-Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
emergency situations, when the mobile phone has net- Voice Mail Calling
work coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect®
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
Phone.
with Automated Systems”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
followed by a number, or sequence of numbers, is also to
be used for navigating through an automated customer
This method is used in instances where one generally has
service center menu structure, and to leave a number on
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
a pager.
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phoneor automated customer service line. Some services rebook entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
Password”, then if you press the
button on the
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
steering wheel and say “Send Voicemail Password” the
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the touchscreen tones over the phone.
button on the steering wheel and say the
or press the
word “Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For NOTE:
example, if required to enter your PIN followed with a • The first number encountered for that contact will be
button on the
pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press the
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
steering wheel and say, “Send 3 7 4 6 #.” Saying “Send”
ignored.
Working With Automated Systems
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone Voice Response Length
network configurations. This is normal.
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time Detailed Voice Response Length.
out settings that are too short and may not allow the 1. Touch the “More” soft-key (where available), then
use of this feature.
touch the “Settings” soft-key.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by 2. Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth®.
Voice Response Length.
These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box
a numbered sequence.
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
indicate your selection.
The
button on the steering wheel can be used when
Phone And Network Status Indicators
you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you
asking “There are two numbers with the name John. Say of your phone and network status when you are attemptbutton on the ing to make a phone call using Uconnect® Phone. The
the full name” you could press the
steering wheel and say, “John Smith” to select that option status is given for network signal strength and phone
without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt. battery strength.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
WARNING!
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Chrysler Group LLC
strongly recommends that you use extreme caution
when using any device or feature that may take your
focus off the road or your hands off the steering
wheel. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use
of any handheld device while driving, encourage the
use of voice-operated systems when possible and
that you become aware of applicable laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth® mobile phone, the audio will be played through your
vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work
the same as if you dial the number using voice a
command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
able to hear the conversation coming from the other If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile
mute the Uconnect® Phone simply touch the “Mute” phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
button on the touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- Voice Command
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
provide at least ½ inch (1 cm) gap between the
from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect®
overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
Phone or vice versa, press the “Transfer” button on the
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would Even though the system is designed for many languages
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from and accents, the system may not always work for some.
you.
When navigating through an automated system such as
voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking the
• Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during
digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
a voice command period.
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not store names in
Performance is maximized under:
your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Low Road Noise
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.
• Dry Weather Condition
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Voice Text Reply
• Low Road Noise
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
• Dry Weather Conditions
• Operation From The Driver’s Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not
the Uconnect® Phone.
Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth® to use
this feature. If the Uconnect® Phone determines your
phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over
Bluetooth® the “Messaging” button will be grayed out
and the feature will not be available for use.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
3
Voice Text List
NOTE: Uconnect® Phone SMS is only available when the
vehicle is not moving.
Voice Text Reply
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,
you will have the following options:
• Send a Reply
• Forward
• Call
Send Messages Using Soft-Keys:
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
a new message:
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key.
Preset Message List
2. Touch the “messaging” soft-key then “New Message.”
4. If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message
3. Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person
sent.
you wish to send the message to.
5. Press “Send” or “Cancel.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
1. Press the
button.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile.”
3
3. After the system prompts you for what message you
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List.” There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
button and
interrupt the system by pressing the
saying the message you want to send.
After the system confirms that you want to send your
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Preset Message List
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List of Preset Messages:
10. I will be <number> minutes late.
1. Yes.
11. See you in <number> minutes.
2. No.
12. Stuck in traffic.
3. Okay.
13. Start without me.
4. I can’t talk right now.
14. Where are you?
5. Call me.
15. Are you there yet?
6. I’ll call you later.
16. I need directions.
7. I’m on my way.
17. I’m lost.
8. Thanks.
18. See you later.
9. I’ll be late.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be re-established by switching the mobile
phone OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
6. Send dial tones for automated systems is available
while a call is active. This is an example that uses a
You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
Phonebook Record named “Voicemail Password.”
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send a
message to John Smith” and the system will ask you 7. Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but
which phone number you want to send a message to for
only the first number encountered in a contact name
John Smith.
will be sent. For example if there is a number stored in
the Home and Work numbers for the contact “VoiceYou can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
mail password” only the Home number will be sent.
“Other.”
8. If your phone does not support phonebook download
You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
commands will return a response that the contact does
You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
not exist in the phonebook.
number supported by your Mobile phone.
9. Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have
been pre-loaded in the phonebook. Commands such as
These commands can be used during a phone call after
“Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assistance” will call
pushing the Uconnect® Voice Command button on
the corresponding number stored with those contacts.
the steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted
while the VR session is active.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
5. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
NOTE:
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send 6. You can replace “4” with any message number shown
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
on the screen.
which phone number you want to send a message to
7. If your phone does not support phonebook download
for John Smith.
or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
commands will return a response that the contact does
“Other.”
not exist in the phonebook.
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect®
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth®.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold VOICE COMMAND
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite
radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod® and
SiriusXM Travel Link.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Command system to recognize user voice
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking
• This device must accept any interference received, or a raised voice level.
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two
responses:
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
• I didn’t understand
• I didn’t get that, etc.
If a command is not spoken a second time, the system
will respond with an error and give some direction as
what can be said based on the context you are in. After
three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
When you press the Uconnect® Voice Command
button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal session will end.
to give a command.
button
Pressing the Uconnect® Voice Command
while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.”
The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you
can say a command. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or To hear available commands, press the Uconnect® Voice
button and say “Help.” You will hear
“Help.”
Command
available commands for the screen displayed.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon Natural Speech
the active application.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
a normal speaking volume.
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
The system will best recognize your speech if the win- and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is would like to.”
set to low.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly Smith.”
For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
system identifies the topic or context and provides the Changing The Volume
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
call?” in the case where a phone call was requested but the
button.
specific name was not recognized.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
question to which the user can respond without pressing
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Combutton.
the Uconnect® Voice Command
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
Uconnect® Voice Commands
system.
The Uconnect® Voice Command system understands
two types of commands. Universal commands are available at all times. Local commands are available if the
supported radio mode is active.
Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect® Voice Combutton.
mand
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session In
Radio/Player Modes
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when
a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect® Voice
button.
Command
Source
To switch to the audio source, say “Change source to
Disc” for example. This command can be given in any
mode or screen:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
NOTE:
1. You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM.”
2. You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite
station name received by the radio.
3. You can replace “8” with any other satellite channel
number received by the radio.
4. You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
NOTE:
1. You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any corresponding names on the current device that is playing.
2. You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is
currently playing. Command is only available when
CD is playing.
3. Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod® is connected and playing.
4. VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
based on the music metadata contained on the
loaded/connected device.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
NOTE:
1. You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines.”
2. You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams.”
3. You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or
“Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
NOTE:
1. Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
2. You can replace “Player” with “Radio,” “Navigation,”
“Phone,” “Climate,” “More” or “Settings.”
3. Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
NOTE:
SEATS
1. You can also say “Find City,” “Find Favorite,” “Find Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Play by Category,” “Find Play by Name,” “Find Re- vehicle.
cently Found,” “Where to?” or “Go Home.”
2. You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant,” “Fuel,”
“Transit,” “Lodging,” “Shopping,” “Bank,” “Entertainment,” “Recreation,” “Attractions,” “Community,” “Auto Services,” “Hospitals,” “Parking,” “Airport,” “Police Stations,” “Fire Stations,” or “Auto
Dealers.”
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
near the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up, down, Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
forward, rearward or to tilt the seat.
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
Power Seat Switch
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch; the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
The Power Lumbar switch is located on the outboard side
of the driver’s seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the Heated Seats — If Equipped
switch will raise or lower the position of the support.
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The heated seats are operated using the
Uconnect® System.
WARNING!
Power Lumbar Switch
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Touch the “Driver” or “Pass” seat soft-key (located on the Uconnect® display) once to select
HI-level heating. Touch the soft-key a second
time to select LO-level heating. Touch the softkey a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
For Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect® 4.3:
system will automatically switch to LO-level after apPress the CLIMATE hard-key (located on the left side of
proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
the Uconnect® display) to enter the climate control
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
screen.
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
soft-key a second time to select LO-level heating. Push
Touch the “Controls” soft-key located on the Uconnect® the soft-key a third time to shut the heating elements
OFF.
display.
For Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect® 8.4:
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
Controls Soft-Key
Touch the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft- NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
key once to select HI-level heating. Push the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
3
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
For models equipped with manual seats, the driver and
passenger seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by
using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near
the floor.
Manual Seat Adjustment
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located and
move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once
the desired position has been reached. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position.
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the
lever, lean back to the desired position and release the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Seatback Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
The seat height control lever is located on the outboard
side of the seat. Raise the lever to raise the seat. Lower the
lever to lower the seat. The total seat travel is approximately 2.15 in (55 mm).
Seat Height Adjustment Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows for extended cargo space. When the
seat is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor
surface (allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up
to the instrument panel). The fold-flat seatback also has a
hardback surface that you can use as a work surface
when the seat is folded flat and the vehicle is not in
motion.
Fold-Flat Seat
Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold the
seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
WARNING!
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. Adjust any seat only while
the vehicle is parked.
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
Active Head Restraints (AHR) — Front Seats
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment can not be
readily identified by any markings, only through visual
inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be
split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam
and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Push Button
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
3
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Supplemental
Active Head Restraints (AHR)/Resetting Active Head
Restraints (AHR)” in “Safety” for further information.
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Second Row Seats
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the
adjustment button, located on the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should be checked prior to operating the vehicle and
never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Third Row Passenger Seats — Seven Passenger
Models
These head restraints are non-adjustable and nonremovable. However, you can fold them forward when
Adjustment Button
they are not in use by passengers. Refer to “50/50 Split
NOTE:
Third-Row Passenger Seats With Fold-Flat Feature —
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified Seven Passenger Models” for further information.
technicians, for service purposes only. If any of the head
restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
• For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Safety”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
without having the head restraint unfolded and
locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury to the passenger in the event
of a collision.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• On seven passenger models, do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat with the second row
seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the passenger
could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats
To provide additional storage area, each second-row
passenger seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some seating room
if needed.
NOTE: Prior to folding the second-row passenger seat,
make sure the front seatback is not in a reclined position.
This will allow the second-row seat to fold easily.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
2. Place one hand on the seatback and apply a gentle
pressure.
To Fold The Seat
1. Locate the control lever on the lower outboard side of
the seat.
3. Lift the control lever with the other hand, allow the
seatback to move forward slightly, and then release the
lever.
WARNING!
To prevent personal injury or damage to objects,
keep your head, arms, and objects out of the folding
path of the seatback.
4. Gently guide the seatback into the folded position.
Seatback Release
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Unfold The Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it in place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat. Lift
the lever to move the seat forward or rearward. Release
the lever once the seat is in the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Manual Seat Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
3
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is on the outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seatback, lean back, lift the lever, position the
seatback as desired, and then release the lever. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean back, lift
the lever, lean forward, and then release the lever once
the seatback is in the upright position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Recline Lever
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Seatback/Armrest — Second Row Passenger Seat
Seatback/Armrest
Raise the seatback/armrest and lock it in place when not
The latch release-loop is located at the top of the in use, or when additional seating area is required.
seatback/armrest. Pull the release-loop forward to release the latch and then downward to lower the
seatback/armrest.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
WARNING!
Keep the latch clean and free of objects and be
certain that the seatback/armrest is locked securely
into position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
Move the control lever on the upper outboard side of the
seatback forward. Then, in one fluid motion, the seat
cushion flips upward and the seat moves forward on its
tracks.
3
Stadium Tip ’n Slide™ (Easy Entry/Exit Seat) —
Seven Passenger Models
This feature allows passengers to easily enter or exit the
third-row passenger seats from either side of the vehicle.
To Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat Forward
NOTE: Raise the seatback/armrest before moving the
seat to allow for full seat travel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Tip ’n Slide™ Control Lever
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this position, as it is only intended for entering and exiting
the third row seats. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
To Unfold And Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat
Rearward
Tip ’n Slide™ Seat
Move the seatback rearward until it locks in place and
then continue sliding the seat rearward on its tracks until
it locks in place.
NOTE: A hand-grip is molded into the front of each Push the seat cushion downward to lock it in place.
quarter trim panel near the door opening to assist entry Adjust the seat track position as desired. Using body
and exit from the third-row passenger seats.
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
To Fold The Seatback
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback and seat are locked
securely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause
serious injury.
Pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the
seatback upward, push the seatback forward slightly, and
release the release-loop. Then, continue to push the
seatback forward. The head restraints will fold automatically as the seatback moves forward.
50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats With
Fold-Flat Feature — Seven Passenger Models
To provide additional storage area, each third-row passenger seatback can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating
room if needed.
NOTE: Prior to folding the third-row passenger seatback, make sure the second-row passenger seatback is
not in a reclined position. This will allow the seatback to
fold easily.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Seatback Release
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The seatback can also be locked in the reclined position.
Grasp the assist strap loop on the seatback and pull it To do so, pull the latch release-loop located at the top of
toward you to raise the seatback. Continue to raise the the seatback upward, allow the seatback to recline, and
release the release-loop.
seatback until it locks in place. Raise the head restraint to
lock it in place.
To Unfold The Seatback
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
without having the head restraint unfolded and
locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury to the passenger in the
event of a collision.
(Continued)
Assist Strap
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
with the second row seatback(s) folded flat. In a
collision, the passenger could slide underneath the
seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
3
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Outside of the vehicle, locate the safety latch lever 3. Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
near the center of the grille between the grille and
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the
hood opening. Push the safety latch lever to the right
hole on the underside of the hood.
and then raise the hood.
Hood Prop Rod
Underhood Safety Latch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
LIGHTS
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
• Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod
is fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm
downward push at the center front edge of the
hood to ensure that both latches engage. Never
drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Headlight Switch
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking lights and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Headlight Time Delay
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for The Daytime Running Lights will turn ON the first time
up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area. the vehicle is shifted out of PARK, and remain ON unless
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch the parking brake is applied. Upon returning to the
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the PARK position, the DRLs will turn OFF. DRLs will turn
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins OFF when the ignition is switched OFF.
when the headlight switch is turned off.
NOTE: The daytime running lights can be turned on and
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds off using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings — Customer Programmable Features” in “Understandof turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If you turn the headlights, parking lights or ignition
Lights-On Reminder
switch ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
turn off in the normal manner.
when the driver’s door is opened.
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings
— Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
headlight
switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
switch.
press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate when the low beam
headlights or parking lights are on. However, selecting
the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
Fog Light Switch
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
three times then automatically turn off.
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Turn Signals
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
ignition to the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
switch.
Flash-To-Pass
Dimmer Controls
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel. Rotating
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
the dimmer control upward with the parking lights or
released.
headlights on will increase the brightness of the instruInterior Lights
ment panel lights, door map pockets and cupholders (if
equipped).
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
High/Low Beam Switch
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio
when the position lights or headlights are on.
Map/Reading Lights
Dimmer Controls
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Refer to “Overhead Console” in “UnRotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior information.
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Dome Light Position
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on located at the end of the lever. For information on using
the rear window wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window
the left side of the steering column.
Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause
between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer control lever to one of the first five
detents to select the desired delay interval.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
between cycles at vehicle speeds below 10 mph
(16 km/h). At speeds greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the
delay varies from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between
cycles.
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Front Wiper Control
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
There are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operathe wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every two
tion.
seconds to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Front Wiper Control
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the
“park” position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while
they are operating. The wipers will resume operation
when you turn the ignition switch back to the ON
position.
• Turn the windshield wipers OFF when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than OFF.
• In cold weather, always turn OFF the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the park position
before turning OFF the engine. If the wiper switch
is left ON and the wipers freeze to the windshield,
damage to the wiper motor may occur when the
vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned OFF, and the blades cannot return to the
“park” position, damage to the wiper motor may
occur.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
Windshield Washers
WARNING! (Continued)
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the second detent.
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for Mist Feature
two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then Push the washer knob, located on the end of the multiresume the intermittent interval previously selected.
function lever, inward to the first detent to activate a
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or
the OFF position, the wipers will operate for two or three spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to
operate until you release the lever.
wipe cycles and then turn OFF.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, pull the control handle upward until
fully engaged.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect® System.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering wheel.
Press the “Heated Wheel” soft-key a second time to turn
the heated steering wheel off.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
Controls Soft-Key
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
3
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — RES +
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3 — SET 4 — CANCEL
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
To Deactivate
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the U.S. Speed (mph)
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
out erasing the set speed memory.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
To Resume Speed
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed Metric Speed (km/h)
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
To Vary The Speed Setting
2 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 2 km/h.
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
the new set speed will be established.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can dethe new set speed will be established.
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed To Accelerate For Passing
To Decrease Speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
continue to decrease until the button is released, then speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
the new set speed will be established.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 2 km/h
Control.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
Metric Speed (km/h)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® System Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 59 in
(150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® Warning Display
ParkSense® Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect® will turn ON indicating the system status.
System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Park Assist Ready
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
3
Park Assist System Off
Slow Tone
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2Slow
Second Tone
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled using the
Uconnect® System. The available choices are: Off, Sound
Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2 Slow
Flashing
1 Slow
Flashing
When the ParkSense® soft-key is pressed to disable the
system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the outer
surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstrucAssist system has detected a fault condition, the Election and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will actuate a
to appear see an authorized dealer.
single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display
the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST”, “SERVICE PARK ASSIST”, If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “UnCleaning The ParkSense® System
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
system has detected a fault condition, the EVIC will and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
display the ⬙CLEAN PARK ASSIST⬙, ⬙SERVICE PARK scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damASSIST⬙, OR ⬙SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM⬙ mes- age the sensors.
sages for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
NOTE:
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operobstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
ating properly.
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
bumper.
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
• Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as
• When you turn ParkSense® off, the EVIC will display
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you
12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
the EVIC.
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the EVIC will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense®.
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The
following table shows the approximate distances for each
zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Touchscreen Radio
1. Turn the Radio on.
2. Push the “More” soft-key.
3
3. Push the “Settings” soft-key.
4. Push the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
5. Push the check box soft-key next to “Parkview®
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Overhead Console
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights, Courtesy/Reading Lights
storage for sunglasses, an interior observation mirror and
The overhead console has two courtesy lights. The lights
an optional power sunroof switch.
turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is
opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light off.
You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing
the outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows.
Sunglasses Storage
To access the storage compartment, press on the raised
bars on the compartment door in the center of the console
and release and the door will swing downward.
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
Courtesy/Reading Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
Interior Observation Mirror
The convex interior observation mirror provides the
driver and front seat passenger a wide field of view to
conveniently view passengers sitting in the rear passenger seats. To use the interior observation mirror, press on
the raised bars on the compartment door and release (the
door will swing downward), then raise the door until it is
almost closed and release. The door will latch in position
to use the interior observation mirror.
3
NOTE: From the “observation mirror” position, the door
can only be closed.
Observation Mirror
To return to the full open position, the door must first be
closed and then opened by pressing the latch again to Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped
release.
Refer to “Power Sunroof” in “Understanding the Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink®
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu- indicator flashes.
rity Alarm is active.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
Training The Garage Door Opener
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door 1 — Door Opener
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to 2 — Training Button
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
follow these steps:
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away
from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
button you want to program and the hand-held transsteps.
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
and observe the indicator light.
remaining steps.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT several seconds of transmission.
erase the channels.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigReprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
follow these steps:
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
time-out in the same manner.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
door or gate motor.
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
and observe the indicator light.
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro•
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programgram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
view.
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
erase the channels.
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
fully trained.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
Security
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
follow these steps:
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all channels
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
Do not release the button.
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/
Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all Troubleshooting Tips
remaining steps.
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
Using HomeLink®
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office light- • Did you unplug the device for programming and
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
remember to plug it back in?
also be used at any time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING! (Continued)
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
General Information
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
(Continued)
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
3
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Power Sunroof Switch
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
Sunroof Fully Closed
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward to
full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obClosing Sunroof — Express
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucsecond and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. release to Express Close.
This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close operaVenting Sunroof — Express
tion, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunshade Operation
Sunroof Maintenance
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition Off Operation
open.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
NOTE: The delay time if programmable using the
Uconnect® system. Refer to “Uconnect® System” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Front 12 Volt Power Outlet
A 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located in the center
console below the radio. The power outlet has power This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
available when the ignition in the ON/RUN or ACC lighter unit. To preserve the heating element, do not
hold the lighter in the heating position.
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A second 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located inside A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the back
the center console storage area. Power is available with the of the center console. This power outlet has power
ignition is in the ON/RUN, ACC or LOCK position.
available when the ignition is in the LOCK, ON or ACC
position.
Center Console 12 Volt Power Outlet
Rear Seat 12 Volt Power Outlet
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
A fourth fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® knob
quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet and element must be used.
has power available when the ignition is in the ON or
ACC position.
CAUTION!
Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• The power outlet on the bottom of the center
console shares the fuse with the power outlet on
the back of the console. The combined usage must
not exceed 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuses
1 — F103 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin & Power Outlet
Console Rear
2 — F102 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel & Power
Outlet Left Rear Cargo Area
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 115 Volt AC
(150 Watt maximum) power outlet located on the back of
the center console. This outlet can power mobile phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring power
up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as
Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
outlet will shut down if the 115 Volt AC (150 Watt
maximum) power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
Power Inverter Operation
CUPHOLDERS
The power inverter is turned on and off using the There are two cupholders, located in the center floor
Uconnect® System.
console, for the front passengers.
Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect® 4.3
3
To turn the power inverter on or off perform the following:
1. Press the “More” hard-key (located next to the
Uconnect® display).
2. Press the “Outlet” soft-key (located on the Uconnect®
display) to turn the power inverter On or Off.
Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect® 8.4 And 8.4 Nav
To enable or disable the power inverter perform the
following:
Floor Console Cupholders
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key.
For passengers in the second row there are two cuphold2. Press the “Outlet” soft-key to turn the power inverter ers, located in the center armrest between the two seats.
On or Off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the armrest is folded flat the cupholders are in the In addition to cupholders, vehicles may also be equipped
back of the Head Restraint. The Head Restraint can be with bottle holders. The bottle holders are located on the
door trim panels.
adjusted to better position the cupholders.
Armrest Cupholders
Door Bottle Holder
For vehicles equipped with third row seating, there are
additional cupholders located in the trim panels.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
3
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to
open the glove compartment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Glove Compartment
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Floor Console Storage
Center Console Storage
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the floor There is a storage tray and storage compartment located
console.
under the center console armrest.
Floor Console Cubby Bin
Center Console
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of
the lid, to gain access to the storage tray and storage
compartment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
3
Center Console Storage Tray
Center Console Storage Compartment
The storage tray can be slid forward and rearward or
removed to access the center console storage compartment.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sliding Armrest
WARNING!
The center console armrest can also be slid rearward for
easy access to the storage area.
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat Storage — If
Equipped
The seat latch release-loop is located in the center of the
seat cushion between the seat cushion and the seatback.
Pull the loop upward to release the latch and then
forward to open the seat to the detent position.
Sliding Armrest
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely
into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for passengers. An improperly latched seat cushion could cause
serious injury.
Second-Row Passenger Seat Temporary Storage
Bin
Front Passenger Seat Storage Compartment
NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not
interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the
seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it
latches to the base.
This is a temporary storage bin designed for use when
the seatback/armrest is down. Be sure to remove all
items from this bin before raising the seatback/armrest.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery
Retainers — If Equipped
In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner
NOTE: Position the front seat to at least a mid-track
A map storage pocket and grocery retainers are located position to provide easier access to the storage bin.
on the back of the drivers seatback.
An in-floor storage bin is located behind each front seat.
Each 1.6 gal (5.9L) bin can hold up to 12, 12 oz (0.35L)
cans, plus ice, or other items. The removable bin liner
allows for easy filling, emptying, and cleaning.
To access the bin, position the floor mat aside (if
equipped). Pull the door latch release-loop upward to
release the latch and then forward to open the bin door.
Seat Storage And Grocery Retainers
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
3
In-Floor Storage
Removable Liner
The liner can be removed for easy cleaning.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight — If Equipped
The rechargeable LED flashlight stores in its charging station
in the left rear quarter trim panel. To remove it, press on the
indent on the side of the flashlight and release.
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Three-Press Switch
Rechargeable Flashlight
NOTE: Be sure to return the flashlight to its charging
station when not in use to ensure it is ready for operation
the next time you need it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
Cargo Management System
Seven Passenger System Features
• A large built-in storage bin with a hinged hardcover
located in the floor behind the third-row passenger
A raised load floor that sits on top of a large built-in
seats.
storage bin.
• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
A tri-fold door built into the load floor that allows easy
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
access to items in the built-in storage bin.
to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
Vehicle” for further information.
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
• 50/50 split third-row passenger seats with fold flat
to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
Vehicle” for further information.
to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
Vehicle” for further information.
which extends cargo space even further. Refer to
• An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
“Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vewhich extends cargo space even further. Refer to
hicle” for further information.
“Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your VeCargo tie-downs.
hicle” for further information.
Five Passenger System Features
•
•
•
•
•
• A retractable cargo area cover (if equipped).
• Cargo tie-downs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Tie-Downs
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision, a tie-down
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
Cargo tie-downs are located on both rear trim panels.
These tie-downs should be used to secure loads safely
when the vehicle is moving.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cargo Tie-Downs
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left Retractable Cargo Area Cover (If Equipped) — Five
door center pillar.
Passenger Models
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear protect passengers from loose cargo.
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
sway.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep
items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the
liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not
in use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to
make more room in the cargo area.
To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the
flat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert either
the left or the right spring-loaded post (located on the
ends of the cover housing) into the left attachment point
or the right attachment point (shown).
Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover
Insert the spring-loaded post on the opposite end of the
cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite
side of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
Grab the cover handle and pull it toward you. As the
cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the rear attachment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the notches in
the trim panels. Lower the cover to position the posts into
the bottom of the notches and release the handle.
WARNING!
A cargo cover that is unsecured in the vehicle could
cause injury in a collision. It could become airborne
during a sudden stop and strike someone inside the
vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo
floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the
cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent
position for rear wiper operation.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear window wiper/washer control is located on the
left side of the steering column.
Rotate the switch upward past the first detent
position to activate the rear washer. The washer
pump will continue to operate as long as the switch is
held. Upon release, the wiper will cycle three times
before returning to the set position.
Rear Wiper/Washer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
CAUTION!
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
to the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return
to the “Park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the
wiper will resume function at whichever position the
switch is set at.
• Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an
automatic car wash. Damage to the rear wiper may
result if the rear wiper switch is left in the ON
position.
• In cold weather, always turn off the rear wiper
switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If the
rear wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper
freezes to the window, damage to the rear wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the rear wiper blade from returning to the park
position. If the rear wiper control is turned off and
the blade cannot return to the park position, damage to the rear wiper motor may occur.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Window Defroster
CAUTION!
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Press this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
2. Relocate the cross rails, aligning the cross rail stanchions (end pieces) with one of the vertical marks on
the outboard surface of the side rail for proper positioning. There are four frontward marks for the front
cross rail and four rearward marks for the rear cross
rail. Make sure the cross rails remain equally spaced or
parallel at any position for proper function.
The roof rack cross rails and side rails are designed to
carry cargo weight. The load must not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg), and it should be distributed uniformly over the
cross rails. In addition, the roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the
total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the roof
rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity. 3. Tighten the knobs on each cross rail to lock it in
position. As you tighten the knob, make sure the
NOTE: Metal crossbars are offered by MOPAR® accesclamp tooth engages completely into the side rail slot.
sories. See your authorized dealer.
4. Attempt to move the cross rail to ensure that it is
To Move The Cross Rails
locked in position.
1. Loosen the knobs on top of each cross rail approxiNOTE:
mately six turns to disengage the clamp tooth from the
side rail.
• To help control wind noise when installing the cross
rails, make sure the arrows marked on the underside
of the cross rails face the front of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To help reduce the amount of wind noise when the
cross rails are not in use, fasten the front cross rail in
the fourth position from the front and the rear cross
rail in the eighth position. The tie down holes on the
cross rail ends should always be used to tie down the
load. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the
load remains securely attached.
CAUTION!
• Cross rails should remain equally spaced or parallel at any luggage rack position for proper function.
Noncompliance could result in damage to the roof
rack, cargo, and vehicle.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to loads.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .300
▫ Oil Change Due . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .302
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ EVIC White Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ EVIC Amber Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Tire PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . .324
▫ Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Turn Menu OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ EVIC Red Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 4.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® System 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .337
䡵 Uconnect® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Important Notes For Single Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio . . .355
▫ VES™ Remote Control — If Equipped . . . . . . .356
▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .360
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .361
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
▫ Single Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2
While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1. . . . . .353
▫ System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .373
▫ Right-Hand Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e., CD)
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .374
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .375
▫ Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) With
Touchscreen — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
▫ Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Side Window Demist Outlet
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Uconnect® System
— Glove Compartment
6 — Switch Bank
7 — Uconnect® Hard Controls
8 — SD Memory Card Slot
9 — Power Outlet
10 — CD/DVD Slot
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
11 — Engine Start/Stop Button
12 — Hood Release Lever
13 — Dimmer Controls
14 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
3. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
1. Tachometer
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD II, that
This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute
monitors engine and automatic transmission con(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,
trol
systems.
The light will illuminate when the key is in
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
2. Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
during starting, stays on, or turns on while engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for not require towing.
further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
4. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in
the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
5. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
This indicator will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
8. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display /
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven Odometer Display
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the distance the vehicle has been driven.
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
for a defective outside light bulb.
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
6. High Beam Indicator
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
This indicator shows that the high beam head- odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever for- technician should leave the odometer reading the same
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam. then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was 10. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to Equipped
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
should be checked monthly when cold and
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
must be reset at zero.
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
instrument cluster. For further information, refer to determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
This indicator will illuminate when the park (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
lights or headlights are turned on.
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
9. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
12. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
the driver or front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled, a System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving,
11. Seat Belt Reminder Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesdetected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
sary.
inspected by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
tion.
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
14. Speedometer
13. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
Indicates vehicle speed.
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition 15. Fuel Door Reminder
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
vehicle.
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However, 16. Fuel Gauge
the conventional brake system will continue to operate The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
CAUTION!
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
18. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
4
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful The system allows the driver to select information by
information by pushing the switches mounted on the pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
wheel:
• Radio Info
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Information
• Warning Message Displays
• Turn Menu OFF
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
• UP Button
• BACK Button
Push and release the UP button to scroll upward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units)
and sub-menus.
• DOWN Button
Push the BACK button to scroll back to a
previous menu.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
Push and release the DOWN button to scroll The EVIC display consists of three sections:
downward through the main menus and
1. The top line where compass direction, odometer line
sub-menus.
and outside temperature are displayed.
• SELECT Button
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
messages are displayed.
Push and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus or sub-menus. Push and hold 3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odomthe SELECT button for two seconds to reset
eter line.
features.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Push Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙.
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds
and then returns to the previous screen. Examples of this
message type are ⬙Memory System Unavailable - Not in
Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the Push Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
Service Keyless System
middle, and red telltales on the left.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with either
the following messages:
turn signal on)
Remote start aborted — Door ajar
Lamp Out (with vehicle graphic showing which of the 4
Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
turn signals is/are out).
Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
Key Battery Low (with a single chime)
Remote start aborted — Fuel low
Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more doors open,
with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/ h])
Remote start active — Push Start Button
Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
Vehicle Not in Park
Low Tire Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure Monitor” in
“Starting And Operating”
Key Left Vehicle
Key Not Detected
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to EVIC White Indicators
information on “Tire Pressure Monitor” in “Starting And This area will show reconfigurable white caution tellOperating”
tales. These telltales include:
Channel # Transmit
• Shift Lever Status
Channel # Training
Channels Cleared
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed
indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1”
indicate the Autostick™ feature has been engaged and
the gear selected is displayed. For further information on
Autostick™ , refer to “Starting And Operating.”
Did Not Train
• Electronic Speed Control ON
Channel # Trained
Clearing Channels
Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And
Operating”)
Oil Change Due (with a single chime)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
• Electronic Speed Control SET
EVIC Red Indicators
This light will turn on when the electronic This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
speed control is SET. For further information, telltales include:
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- • Door Ajar
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
EVIC Amber Indicators
more doors may be ajar.
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telltales. These telltales include:
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
• Low Fuel Light
chime.
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal • Liftgate Ajar
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is ajar.
fuel is added.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
chime.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authoThis light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the
rized dealer.
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
four minutes when this light turns on.
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
This light informs you of a problem with the
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
• Charging System Light
turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a
This light shows the status of the electrical chargbulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
ing system. The light should come on when the
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
ignition switch is first turned ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
the charging system light remains on, it means that the placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condiThis light indicates that the transmission fluid
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge aptemperature is running hot. This may occur
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
the following procedure:
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE Average Fuel Economy
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When
OFF/LOCK position.
the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “RESET” or
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last
fuel average reading before the reset.
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
4
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and push the
SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy functions
will display in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Fuel Economy
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
This display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graph
form while driving. This will monitor the gas mileage in
real-time as you drive and can be used to modify driving
habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Vehicle Speed
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Push the SEloading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of LECT button to display the current speed in mph or
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
km/h. Pushing the SELECT button a second time will
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) toggle the unit of measure between mph or km/h.
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant EVIC.
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Trip Info
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip
Info” displays highlighted in the EVIC and push the
SELECT button. Pushing the SELECT button with ⬙Trip
Info⬙ highlighted will cause the EVIC display to show
Trip A, Trip B, and Elapsed Time all in one display. If you
want to reset one of the three functions you use the UP or
DOWN buttons to highlight (select) the feature that you
want to reset. Pushing the SELECT button will cause the
selected feature to reset individually. The three features
can only be reset individually. The following Trip functions display in the EVIC:
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Push and release the SELECT button once to
clear the resettable function.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire PSI
• Oil Pressure
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire Displays the actual oil pressure.
PSI:” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Push the SELECT
• Trans Temperature
button to view a graphic of the vehicle with a tire
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
pressure value at each corner of the graphic.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
• Engine Hours
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Info” displays in the EVIC and push the SELECT button.
Messages
Push the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Mesavailable information displays.
sages: XX” displays highlighted in the EVIC. If there is
• Coolant Temp
more than one message, pushing the SELECT button will
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
display a stored warning message. Push and release the
UP and DOWN buttons if there is more than one message
• Oil Temperature
to step through the remaining stored messages. If there
Displays the actual oil temperature.
are no message, pushing the SELECT button will do
nothing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
control knob to scroll through menus and change settings
(i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the control knob one or
Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button. Pushmore times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pushing
any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the Soft-Keys
menu back.
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® Touchscreen.
Uconnect® SETTINGS
Customer Programmable Features —
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of soft and Uconnect® 4.3 Settings
hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access
that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features that may be equipped such as
programmable features.
Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Heated Seats, Engine Off Operation, Compass
Hard-Keys
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth® and SIRIUS Setup
Hard-Keys are located on the left and right side of the through hard-keys and soft-keys.
Uconnect® 4.3 screen. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter
control knob located on the right side of the Climate
Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the
Turn Menu OFF
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a Press the SETTINGS hard-key to access the Settings
time.
screen, use the “Page Up” / “Page Down” soft-keys to
scroll through the following settings. Touch the desired
setting soft-key to change the setting using the description shown on the following pages for each setting.
1 — Uconnect® 4.3 Settings Hard-Key
Uconnect® 4.3 Soft-Keys
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
the “English,” “French” (Français) or “Spanish” (Espa• Brightness
ñol) soft-key to select the language preferred. Then touch
Touch the “Brightness” soft-key to change this display. the back arrow soft-key. As you continue, the information
When in this display, you may select display brightness will display in the selected language.
with the headlights on and the headlights off. Adjust the
brightness with the “+” and “–” setting soft-keys or by • Units
selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” Touch the “Units” soft-key to change this display. When
soft-keys. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
in this display, you may switch the EVIC, odometer, and
navigation system (if equipped) between US and Metric
• Mode
units of measure. Touch “US” or “Metric” then touch the
Touch the “Mode” soft-key to change this display. When back arrow soft-key. As you continue, the information
in this display, you may select one of the auto display will display in the selected units of measure.
settings. To change Mode status touch the “Day,” “Night”
• Voice Response
or “Auto” soft-key, then by touch the back arrow soft-key.
Touch the “Voice Response” soft-key to change the Voice
• Language
Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Touch the “Language” soft-key to change this display. Length, press and release the “Brief” or “Long” soft-key.
When in this display, you may select one of three Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
Display
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Touch Screen Beep
• Show Time Status
Touch the “Touch Screen Beep” soft-key to turn on or
shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button
(soft-key) is pressed. To change the Touch Screen Beep
setting press and release the “ON” or “OFF” soft-key,
then touch the back arrow soft-key.
Touch the “Show Time Status” soft-key to change this
display. When in this display, you may turn on or shut off
the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show
Time Status setting, press and release the “ON” or “OFF”
soft-key. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
Clock
• Sync Time — If Equipped
• Set Time
Touch the “Sync Time” soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may have the radio set the time
automatically. To change the Sync Time setting, press and
release the “ON” or “OFF” soft-key. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.
Touch the “Set Time” soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may select the time display
settings. To make your selection, touch the “Set Time”
soft-key, adjust the hours and minutes using the up and
down soft-keys, select AM or PM, select 12 hr or 24 hr.
Then touch the back arrow soft-key when all selections
are complete.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Safety / Assistance
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
• Park Assist
Touch the “Hill Start Assist” soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the “Hill Start Assist” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.”
Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
Touch the “Park Assist” soft-key to change this display.
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park
Assist status, press and release the “OFF,” “Sound Only”
or “Sounds and Display” soft-key. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
Lights
• Illuminated Approach
Touch the “Illuminated Approach” soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, touch the “0,” “30,” “60” or “90” soft-key.
Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Headlights With Wipers
• Daytime Running Lights — If Available
Touch the “Headlights With Wipers” soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, and the headlight
switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, touch the “Headlights With Wipers” soft-key and
select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
Touch the “Daytime Running Lights” soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make
your selection, touch the “Daytime Running Lights”
soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.
• Auto High Beams “SmartBeams™”
Touch the “Steering Directed Lights” soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
turn relative to a change in direction of the steering
wheel. To make your selection, touch the “Steering
Directed Lights” soft-key and select “ON” or ‘OFF.” Then
touch the back arrow soft-key.
Touch the “Auto High Beams” soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
To make your selection, touch the “Auto High Beams”
soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the back
arrow soft-key. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
• Flash Lights With Lock
• Auto Lock
Touch the “Flash Headlights With Lock” soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may
be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, touch the “Flash Headlights With Lock” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then
touch the back arrow soft-key.
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, touch the “Auto
Lock” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Doors & Locks
Touch the “Flash Lights With Lock” soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the front and
rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or
unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection, touch the “Flash Lights With
Lock” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the
back arrow soft-key.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
Touch the “Auto Unlock On Exit” soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, all doors will
unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission
is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s
door is opened. To make your selection, touch the “Auto
Unlock On Exit” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.”
Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
• Flash Lights With Lock
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Remote Door Unlock Order
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
Touch the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” soft-key to
change this display. When this feature is selected, the
horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To
make your selection, touch the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then
touch the back arrow soft-key.
Touch the “Remote Door Unlock Order” soft-key to
change this display. When Unlock Driver Door Only On
1st Press is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on
the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Unlock Driver Door Only
On 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s
• Sounds Horn With Lock
doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected,
Touch the “Sounds Horn With Lock” soft-key to change all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
this display. When this feature is selected, the horn will transmitter UNLOCK button.
chirp when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-NRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your
Go™ (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to
selection, touch the “Sounds Horn With Lock” soft-key
Unlock All Doors On 1st Press, all doors will unlock no
and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the back arrow
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
soft-key.
grasped. If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if Unlock
Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed, touching
the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s
door opening. If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is
selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all the doors (or
use the RKE transmitter).
Heated Seats
• Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
Engine Off Options
Touch the “Passive Entry” soft-key to change this display.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or
unlock buttons. To make your selection, touch the “Passive
Entry” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the
back arrow soft-key. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
• Auto Heated Seats — If Equipped
Touch the “Auto Heated Seats” soft-key to change this
display. When the temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C) the
Driver’s heated seat will turn on. To make your selection,
touch the “Auto Heated Seats” soft-key and select “ON” or
“OFF.” Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
• Headlight Off Delay
Touch the “Headlight Off Delay” soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or
90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the
Headlight Off Delay status, touch the “0,” “30,” “60” or
“90” soft-key. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Engine Off Power Delay
Compass Settings
Touch the “Engine Off Power Delay” soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the power
window switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if
equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power
sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain
active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to
OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. To
change the Engine Off Power Delay status, touch the “0
seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes”
soft-key. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
• Variance
Touch the Variance soft-key to change this display. Compass
Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and
Geographic North. To compensate for the differences, the
variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is
driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass
will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
also calibrate the compass by touching the “ON” soft-key
and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
Audio
• Equalizer
Touch the “Equalizer” soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
Touch the “Calibration” soft-key to change this setting. setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is arrow soft-key.
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
Compass Variance Map
• Calibration
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your mode. To make your selection, press the “Surround
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press Sound” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch
the back arrow soft-key.
directly on the desired setting.
• Balance/Fade
Phone/Bluetooth®
Touch the “Balance/Fade” soft-key to change this dis- • Paired Devices
play. When in this display, you may adjust the Balance This feature shows which phones are paired to the
and Fade settings.
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
Touch the “Speed Adjusted Volume” soft-key to change
this display. This feature increases or decreases volume
relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted
Volume, press the “OFF,” “1,” “2” or “3” soft-key. Then
touch the back arrow soft-key.
SIRIUS Setup
• Channel Skip
SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
your selection, touch the “Channel Skip” soft-key, select
Touch the “Surround Sound” soft-key to change this the channels you would like to skip. Then touch the back
display. This feature provides simulated surround sound arrow soft-key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
• Subscription Info
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services,
it will be necessary to access the information on the
Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
System 8.4 Settings
Touch the “More” soft-key, then touch the “Settings”
soft-key to display the menu setting screen. In this mode
the Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display,
Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub- Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation,
scription Information screen.
Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth® and
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To SIRIUS Setup.
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
the screen or visit the provider online.
time.
NOTE: SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription.
When making a selection, touch the soft-key to enter the
desired mode. Once in the desired mode, touch and
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Once the setting is complete touch the Back Arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the “X”
soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.
Display
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
will be available.
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
• Display Mode
“–” setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
When in this display you may select one of the auto between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and arrow soft-key.
release the “Day,” “Night” or “Auto” soft-key. Then
touch the back arrow soft-key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
• Set Language
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may select one of three
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
the “Set Language” soft-key and then touch the desired
language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, touch the “Brief” or “Detailed” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Units
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch “US” or
“Metric” until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (soft-key) is
pressed. Touch the “Touchscreen Beep” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
Clock
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, touch the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Sync With GPS Time — If Equipped
When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync with GPS Time
setting touch the “Sync with GPS Time” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, indicating that
• Fuel Saver Display In Cluster — If Equipped
the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
The “ECO” message is located in the instrument cluster soft-key to return to the previous menu.
display, this message can be turned on or off. To make • Set Time Hours
your selection, touch the “Fuel Saver Display” soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow “Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
adjust the hours up or down. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the “X”
soft-key to close out of the settings screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
• Set Time Minutes
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
“Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to Safety / Assistance
adjust the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the folsoft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the “X” lowing settings will be available.
soft-key to close out of the settings screen.
• Park Assist
• Time Format
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
When in this display, you may select the time format the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REdisplay setting. Touch the “Time Format” soft-key until a VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting, (18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Assist status, touch and release the “OFF,” “Sound Only”
or “Sounds and Display” button. Then touch the back
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
arrow soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sysdigital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time tem function and operating information.
Status setting touch the “Show Time in Status Bar”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ParkView® Backup Camera
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the “Hill Start Assist” soft-key, until a check-mark apYour vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
pears next to setting, showing that setting has been
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
previous menu.
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a Lights
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will will be available.
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your • Headlight Illumination On Approach
selection, touch the “ParkView® Backup Camera” soft- When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
touch the “+” or “–” soft-key to select your desired time
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) previous menu.
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
“Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further informaWhen this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
tion.
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. • Daytime Running Lights — If Available
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
your selection, touch the “Headlights With Wipers” soft- touch the “Daytime Running Lights” soft-key, until a
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
return to the previous menu.
• Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If
Equipped
• Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, touch the “Auto High Beams”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer to
When this feature is selected, the headlights turn relative
to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To make
your selection, touch the “Steering Directed Lights”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Flash Headlights With Lock
On Exit” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash when
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be selected with • Auto Lock
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make When this feature is selected, all doors will lock autoyour selection, touch the “Flash Headlights with Lock” matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing (24 km/h). To make your selection, touch the “Auto
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key Lock” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setto return to the previous menu.
ting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch
Doors & Locks
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following • Flash Headlight With Lock
settings will be available.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
• Auto Unlock On Exit
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
touch the “Flash Lights With Lock” soft-key, until a
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
opened. To make your selection, touch the “Auto Unlock has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
• Sound Horn With Lock
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the “Sound Horn With Lock” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must
press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to
unlock the passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors
On 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the
first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed to Unlock All Doors
1st Press, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If Driver Door
1st Press is programmed, only the driver’s door will
unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching
the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s
door opening. If driver door first is selected, once the
driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock
switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE
transmitter).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make your
selection, touch the “Passive Entry” soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle.”
• Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Auto-On Driver Heated Seat With Vehicle Start — If
Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat will
automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F
(4.4° C). To make your selection, touch the “Auto Heated
Seats” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
soft-key the following settings will be available.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Delay status touch the “+” or “–” soft-key to select your
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the folreturn to the previous menu.
lowing settings will be available.
Compass Settings
• Engine Off Power Delay
Engine Off Options
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off
Power Delay status touch the “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,⬙
“5 minutes” or “10 minutes” soft-key. Then touch the
back arrow soft-key.
• Headlight Off Delay
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptop
Computers and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with
the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
• Perform Compass Calibration
Touch the “Calibration” soft-key to change this setting.
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need
to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new,
the compass may appear erratic and it may need to be
calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by pressing
the “ON” soft-key and completing one or more 360-degree
turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects)
until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off.
The compass will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Balance/Fade
Compass Variance Map
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
• Equalizer
• Music Info Cleanup
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.
This feature helps organize music files for optimized
music navigation. To make your selection, touch the
“Music Info Cleanup” soft-key, select “On” or “Off”
followed by pressing the back arrow soft-key.
Phone/Bluetooth®
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key the folfinger up or down to change the setting as well as touch lowing settings will be available.
directly on the desired setting.
• Paired Devices
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume to the Uconnect® Supplement.
touch the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” soft-key. Then touch the
back arrow soft-key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SiriusXM Setup
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Subscription Information screen.
After pressing the “SIRIUS Setup” soft-key the following
settings will be available.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
• Channel Skip
the screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
Uconnect® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
your selection, touch the “Channel Skip” soft-key, select
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™) — IF
the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing
EQUIPPED
the back arrow soft-key.
Your rear seat Video Entertainment System (VES™) is
• Subscription Information
designed to give your family years of enjoyment. You can
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free play your favorite CDs or DVDs, listen to audio over the
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free standard video games or audio devices. Please review
services, it will be necessary to access the information on this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features
the Subscription Information screen in order to re- and operation.
subscribe.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
• With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position,
turn the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume
• Screen located in the overhead console: Unfold the
Control knob.
overhead LCD screen by pushing the button on the
overhead console behind the screen.
• When the Video Screen is open and a DVD is inserted
into the radio, the screen turns on automatically, the
headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.
Getting Started
Single Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES™).
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Overhead Video Screen
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The VES™ system will retain the last setting
when turned off.
Play A DVD
1. Press the EJECT button on the radio faceplate (TouchPlay Video Games
screen).
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the input jacks located on the back of the center console.
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks)
starts playing the first track.
on the rear of the center console enable
3. Ensure the VES™ Remote Control and the Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
the monitor to display video directly
from a video camera, connect video
games for display on the screen, or
play music directly from an MP3
player.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight DISC by 1. Video in (yellow)
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by 2. Left audio in (white)
repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press
3. Right audio in (red)
ENTER on the Remote Control.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
jacks:
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playstathe Rear Entertainment Controls.
tion3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter 3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch the
“Power” soft-key.
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more
information.
4. Touch the “1” or “2” soft-key for the channel desired
Ensure the remote control channel selector switch and
and press the “Source” soft-key to select the desired
Headphone switch (IR channel) are the same number.
mode.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX
Channel 2.
2, by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or
by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press
ENTER on the Remote Control.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Touch the “1” or “2” soft-key for the channel desired
and press the “Source” soft-key to select the desired
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and
mode.
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the Important Notes For Single Video Screen System
bottom of the screen.
• VES™ is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio
simultaneously.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1
the desired audio source or repeatedly press the
and right side equates to Channel 2.
MODE button on the remote until the desired audio
• If a video source is selected on Channel 1, then
source appears on the screen.
Channel 2 is for audio only.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
• When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
will display on the screen and the audio will be heard
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
on Channel 1 in the headphones.
the Rear Entertainment Controls.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch the
when the Video Screen is closed.
“Power” soft-key.
Using The Remote Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio
1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the PARK
position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In
vehicles with manual transmission the parking brake
must be engaged even when the vehicle is parked.
Refer to local and state laws.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
Using The Remote Control
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
2. While looking at the Video Screen, highlight DISC by
the Rear Entertainment Controls.
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press 3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch the
ENTER.
“Power” soft-key.
4. Touch the “1” or “2” soft-key for the channel desired
and press the “Source” soft-key to select the desired
• The VES™ system will retain the last setting when
mode.
turned off.
NOTE:
• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not
available in some regions or locations, the vehicle must
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
VES™ Remote Control — If Equipped
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after
five seconds.
Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position,
the remote controls the functionality of headphone
Channel 1 (right side of the screen). When the selector
switch is in the Channel 2, position the remote controls
the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (left side of
the screen).
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone 5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable
station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
through the current audio track or video chapter. In
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power
menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the 12. SLOW – Press to slow playback of a DVD disc. Press
previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to
play (䉴) to resume normal play.
the start of the current or previous audio track or
13. STATUS – Press to display the current status.
video chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the
menu.
14. MODE – Press to change the mode of the selected
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this
7. MENU – Press to return to the main menu of a DVD
manual for details on changing modes.
disc, to select a satellite audio or video channel from
the Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/ 15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP
RANDOM for a CD).
button to access the display settings (see the display
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
the menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded
9. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play.
in the DVD player (if equipped) and the VES™ mode
is selected and the disc is stopped, press the SETUP
10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode,
button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD
pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressSetup Menu of this manual.)
ing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in
the radio.
11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output
for the selected channel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to
return to the previous screen. When navigating a
DVDs disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s
contents.
17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous
tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video
chapter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
18. ENTER – Press to select the highlighted option in a
menu.
Remote Control Storage
The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compartment for the remote control which is accessible when the
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the
two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the
next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the
next audio track or video chapter. In menu modes,
use to navigate in the menu.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
the Rear Entertainment Controls.
3. Touch the “Lock-out” soft-key to lock the remote
control. Pressing the “Lock-out” soft-key a second
time will unlock the remote control.
The Remote Control Storage
NOTE: Remote control lock-out will only apply to the
current ignition cycle. The VES™ will automatically
remove the lock-out if the ignition is cycled to “OFF”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
• Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Volume Control
Power Button
Channel Selection Switch
Power Indicator
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for 1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
operation. To replace the batteries:
switch is in the same position as the headphone
selector switch.
• Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of the
headphones, and then slide the battery cover downward. NOTE:
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
2. Press the MODE button on the remote control.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve 3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such
as a DVD Video), pressing STATUS shows the status
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen.
approximately three minutes after the rear video system is
turned off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pressing the MODE button will advance to the next How Long Does The Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
mode. When the mode is in an audio only source (such as long as you own the Product.
as FM), the Mode Selection menu appears on screen. What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi- use is defective in workmanship or materials.
gate to the available modes and press the ENTER What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
button to select the new mode.
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
BACK button on the remote control.
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replaceUnwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
Warranty
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTthe initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEparticular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wire- FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired® wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-2933332 or email [email protected]
What Will Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option, will You may register your Unwired® wireless headphones
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired® re- online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with 1-888-293-3332.
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System Information
Information Mode Display
displays the current status of the source (such as station
frequency, name, preset or track number, song title, artist
name, album name, etc.).
1. Channel 1 Mode – Displays the current source for
Channel 1.
2. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: The audio
only icon is not used on Channel 1, in a single screen
system. Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the
audio for Channel 1 has been muted using the remote
control’s MUTE button.
3. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: Only in a
single screen system: The audio only icon is displayed
on Channel 2 when Channel 1 is in a video mode.
Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the audio for
Channel 2 has been muted using the remote control’s
When information mode is active, the current mode setting
MUTE button.
for both audio channels is displayed. In addition to the
items called out by number, the remaining information
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
4. Channel 2 Mode — Displays the current source for Numeric Keypad Menu
Channel 2.
5. Remote Locked Out—When the icon is displayed, the
remote control functions are disabled.
6. Clock — Displays the time.
7. Channel 1 Shared Status — When the icon is displayed, the audio for Channel 1 is also shared with the
radio and playing through the cabin speakers.
4
Numeric Keypad Menu
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s
ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner Station List Menu
frequency or track number. To enter the desired digit:
When listening to Satellite audio, pressing the remote
1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲, control’s MENU button displays a list of all available
channels. Navigate this list using the remote control’s
䉴, 䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
navigation buttons to find the desired station, press the
2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote con- remote control’s ENTER button to tune to that station. To
trol’s ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these jump through the list more quickly, navigate to the Page
steps until all digits are entered.
Up and Page Down icons on the screen.
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and Disc Menu
press the remote control’s ENTER button.
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go the remote control’s MENU button displays a list of all
button and press the remote control’s ENTER button. commands which control playback of the disc. Using the
options you can activate or cancel Random play.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Options Menu
Display Settings
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the remote
control’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings
menu. These settings control the appearance of the video
on the screen. The factory default settings are already set
for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these
settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, press the remote control’s navigation buttons to select an item, then press the remote
control’s navigation buttons to change the value for the
currently selected item. To reset all values back to the
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc original settings, select the Default Settings menu option
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the “Options” and press the remote control’s ENTER button.
soft-key activates the Options Settings menu. From this
menu you can adjust Audio, Subtitles, Angle and Title.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
Disc Formats
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the The DVD player is capable of playing the following types
screen closed:
of discs (12 cm or 8 cm diameter):
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
• Close the video screen.
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
notes about DVD Region Codes)
• Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
• To change the current audio mode, press the remote
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select • CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
the next available audio mode without using the
format files
MODE/SOURCE Select menu.
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
DVD Region Codes
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the The DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press geographic region. These region codes must match in
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries disc does not match the region code for the player, the
are installed in the headphones.
disc will stop playing and a warning will be displayed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the DVD player may not be able to play
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the DVD player,
some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
(most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the
help avoid playback problems, use the following guideVideo title is ignored). All multi-channel program matelines when recording discs.
rial is automatically mixed down to two channels, which
may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If you • Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
increase the volume level to account for this change in
closed are playable.
level, remember to lower the volume before changing the
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CDdisc or to another mode.
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
Recorded Discs
each track number is unique.
DVD Audio Support
The DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs • For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or UDF format.
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
CD-DA may also be used for PCM Audio contained on
CD-Based Data.
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R,
DVD-RW and DVD-ROM discs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99 Windows Media Audio) and ACC (MPEG-4 audio; samfolders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
pling frequencies 8 to 48 kHz; mono and stereo) audio
files with the from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
CD-RW).
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
playable in the DVD player, check with the disc recording
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙, WMA files
software publisher for more information about burning
must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or ⬙WMA⬙,
playable discs.
and ACC files must end with the extensions “.acc” or
“.m4a”. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
these extensions for any other types of files.
(CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R and DVD-RW) is with a permanent marker. Do not use adhesive labels as they may
• For MP3 files, ID3 tag data v1, v1.1, v2 and v2.4 (such
separate from the disc, become stuck, and cause permaas artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
nent damage to the DVD player.
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those downCompressed Audio Files (MP3, WMA AND ACC)
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer 3 with data bitrates from 32 to 320 kbit/s,
begin playing the next available file.
including variable bit rates), WMA (All Standard 8.x, 9.x
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the next available file.
Disc Errors
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙
message is displayed on the Radio display and the disc is
automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended disc format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps message.
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD player
supported. For both formats, the recommended will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end of the disc is
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or reached, the DVD player will return to the beginning of the
disc and attempt to play the start of the first track.
DVD player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file, or
the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current or The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperature
previous file.
is above 120°F (49°C). When this occurs, the DVD player will
• To change the current directory, use the remote con- display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off the display until a safe
trol’s PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to
back and fast fwd/skip forward.
protect the optics of the DVD player.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Product Agreement
General Information
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
Dolby® Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, ⬙MLP
Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights
reserved.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
Right-Hand Switch Functions
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear • Press the top of the switch to increase the volume.
surface of the steering wheel. The left and right-hand
• Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume.
controls are rocker-type switches with a pushbutton in
the center of each switch. Reach behind the steering • Press the button in the center of the switch to change
wheel to access the switches.
modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc.).
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio Operation
• Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable
station up from the current setting.
• Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
• Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to
the next preset that you have programmed.
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e., CD)
Operation
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
• Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next precautions:
track.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
• Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to
the beginning of the current track or to listen to the
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
wiping from center to edge.
seconds after the current track begins to play.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch• Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the
ing the disc.
second track, three times to listen to the third track,
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
and so forth.
or anti-static sprays.
• Press the button located in the center of the switch to
change to the next preset that you have programmed. 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the instrument
panel or through the Uconnect® system display.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (RaUnder certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in dio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated display.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If
Equipped
Hard-Keys
Hard-keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect® 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument
panel. There are also hard-keys located below the
Uconnect® touchscreen.
Uconnect® 4.3 Manual with Touchscreen Climate
Hard-Key
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
4
Manual Temperature Controls — Hard-Keys
Uconnect® 4.3 Manual 3 — Zone Temperature
Controls — Soft-Keys
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And
Soft-keys)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Uconnect® 8.4 Manual 3 — Zone Temperature Controls
— Soft-Keys
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
4. Front Defrost Button
CAUTION!
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
5. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Rear Climate Button — If Equipped
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear Provides the passenger with independent temperature
climate controls are ON. Performing this function again control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
will turn OFF the rear climate controls.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
automatically exit Sync.
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
9. SYNC
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
control. Push the button for warmer temperature setThe Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
tings.
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
automatically exit Sync.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
10. Blower Control
11. Modes
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
as follows:
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up
and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to
shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor
outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister outlets.
Hard-Key
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
Soft-Key
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
ON/OFF.
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
15. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 4.3 Only)
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
Press the driver or passenger temperature soft-key to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger NOTE:
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the temFloor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperathe A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
tures. Driver and passenger have independent temperaof the windows.
ture control if Sync mode is not illuminated.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
Climate Control Functions
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
A/C (Air Conditioning)
needed.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (losystem. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
the front of the radiator and through the condenser.
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
pressing the Recirculation control button. The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforPush the button a second time to turn off the Recirculamance.
tion mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
is ON.
feature may be unavailable (soft button greyed out) if
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Conwill cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the trols, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is seRecirculation Control
lected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or and then turn off.
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
MAX A/C
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If
Equipped
The rear MTC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
4
The rear system temperature control soft-keys are located
in the Uconnect® touch system, located on the instrument panel.
Uconnect® 4.3 Manual Rear Climate Soft-Key Controls
Screen
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Blower Up Soft-Key
Mode Soft-Key
Temperature Soft-Key
Blower Down Soft-Key
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5 — Done Soft-Key
6 — Rear Lock Soft-Key
7 — Rear Off Soft-Key
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front Uconnect® Touchscreen
The Three-Zone climate control system allows for adjustment of the rear climate controls from the front ATC
panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control functions now operate rear system.
Uconnect® 8.4 Manual Rear Climate Soft-Key Controls
Screen
1 — Rear Lock Soft-Key
2 — Front Climate Control
Soft-Key
3 — Temperature Up Soft-Key
4 — Temperature Down
Soft-Key
• To return to Front screen, press ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
5 — Blower Up Soft-Key
6 — Mode Soft-Key
7 — Blower Down Soft-Key
8 — Rear Off Soft-Key
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
Rear Lock
• Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock soft-key on the
Uconnect® touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in
the rear display. The rear temperature and air source
are controlled from the front Uconnect® system.
• Rear occupants can only adjust the rear control when
the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off.
4
• The rear MTC is located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle.
Rear MTC Control Features
1 — Blower Speed
2 — Rear Temperature
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3 — Rear MODE
4 — Rear Temperature Lock
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Blower Control
Rear Temperature Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the
Uconnect® system.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel. The rear outlets are located
in the right side trim panel. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect® system,
the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature
knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments
are ignored.
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
4
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) With
Touchscreen — If Equipped
Uconnect® 4.3 Automatic Climate Hard-Key
Hard-Keys
Hard-keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect® 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument
panel. There are also hard-keys located below the
Uconnect® touch screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Automatic Temperature Controls — Hard-Keys
Uconnect® 4.3 Automatic 3 — Zone Temperature
Controls — Soft-Keys
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic 3 — Zone Temperature
Controls — Soft-Keys
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
Soft-keys)
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
1. MAX A/C Button
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
Press and release to change the current setting, the manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing Operation” for more information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Front Defrost Button
CAUTION!
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
7. Rear Climate Button — If Equipped
10. SYNC
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear
climate controls are ON. Performing this function again
will turn OFF the rear climate controls.
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
11. Blower Control
control. Push the button for warmer temperature setBlower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced
tings.
through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
automatically exit Sync.
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected
using either hard-keys or soft-keys as follows:
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature Hard-key
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings. The blower speed increases as you turn the control
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
automatically exit Sync.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-key
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
12. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up
and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to
shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
• Mix Mode
15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
Provides the driver with independent temperature condemist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
snowy conditions.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
13. Climate Control OFF Button
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control time.
ON/OFF.
16. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 4.3 Only)
14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Press the driver or passenger temperature soft-key to
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the temadjust the passenger temperature setting at the same perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures. Driver and passenger have independent temperatime.
ture control if Sync mode is not illuminated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
pressing the Recirculation control button. The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected.
MAX A/C
Push the button a second time to turn off the RecirculaMAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor- tion mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
mance.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C feature may be unavailable (soft button greyed out) if
is ON.
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculawill cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
tion will be disabled automatically if this mode is seselected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
lected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
Recirculation Control
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or and then turn off.
Climate Control Functions
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (4) on the
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
comfort as quickly as possible.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pasunits by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons. Once
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in
the desired temperature is displayed, the system will
this section of the manual.
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
system to function automatically.
Automatic Operation
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Operation Override
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con- The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
trol.
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
air through the headliner outlets.
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air The rear system temperature control soft-keys are located
in the Uconnect® touch system, located on the instrucirculated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
ment panel.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
4
Uconnect® 4.3 Automatic Rear Climate Soft-Key
Controls Screen
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Blower Up Soft-Key
Mode Soft-Key
Temperature Soft-Key
Blower Down Soft-Key
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Done Soft-Key
Rear Lock Soft-Key
Rear Auto Soft-Key
Rear Off Soft-Key
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Rear Climate Soft-Key
Controls Screen
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Rear Auto Soft-Key
Rear Lock Soft-Key
Front Climate Soft-Key
Temperature Up Soft-Key
Temperature Down Soft-Key
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Blower Up Soft-Key
Mode Soft-Key
Blower Down Soft-Key
Rear Off Soft-Key
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center
of the vehicle.
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control functions now operate rear system.
• To return to Front screen, press ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock soft-key on the
Rear ATC Control Features
Uconnect® touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in the
rear display. The rear temperature and air source are con- 1 — Blower Speed
3 — Rear MODE
2 — Rear Temperature
4 — Rear Temperature Lock
trolled from the front Uconnect® system.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
• Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the Rear Blower Control
Uconnect® touchscreen. This turns off the Rear Tem- The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
perature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob.
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
• Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs. volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
• ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats.
The rear outlets are located in the right side trim
panel of the 3rd Row seat. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Temperature Control
Headliner Mode
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the tempera- direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
ture. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the to one side will shut off the airflow.
Uconnect® system.
Bi-Level Mode
When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect® system,
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature
floor outlets.
knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
are ignored.
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headRear Mode Control
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Auto Mode
Floor Mode
• The rear system automatically maintains the correct
Air comes from the floor outlets.
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat
occupants.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
Operating Tips
Vacation Storage
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
suggested control settings for various weather condi- (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
tions.
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
Summer Operation
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
The engine cooling system must be protected with a of compressor damage when the system is started again.
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corroWindow Fogging
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly recoolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended. Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase the blower
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
Winter Operation
but rainy or humid weather.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
• Recirculation mode without A/C should not be used
slush, and snow.
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
A/C Air Filter
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or The climate control system filters outside air containing
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instrucOutside Air Intake
tions.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
Manual Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .419
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Four-Speed Or Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 䡵 AUTOSTICK® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 䡵 ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .429
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .417 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .430
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .442
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .438
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .439
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .456
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .460
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .471
▫ All Season Tires — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .464 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .473
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires —
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
And Wheel — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . .466
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Full Size Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .467
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . .
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. .474
. .477
. .479
. .483
. .483
. .484
. .484
. .485
. .486
. .486
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .494
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . .491
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .495
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .510
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOFFⴖ mode, remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ACC or RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
is in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, press the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain
in the ACC position until the shift lever/shift selector
is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
position. If the shift lever/shift selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed
once, the EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will remain
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
1. Place the shift lever/shift selector in PARK, then press
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
3. If the shift lever/shift selector is not in PARK, the minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two OFF position.
seconds or three short presses in a row with the
vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availThe ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN and
If Engine Fails To Start
START. To change the ignition positions without starting the
vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:
WARNING!
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (EVIC will display
“ACC”),
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (EVIC will
display “ON/RUN”),
(Continued)
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (EVIC will
display “OFF”).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
After Starting
WARNING!
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
WARNING!
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
hour to have an adequate effect on the engine.
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in rebetween the headlight assembly and the Totally Inteverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
grated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the vehicle.
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever. Do not leave the Key Fob in or
near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC
or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
Key Ignition Park Interlock
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned OFF. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK.
This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
shifting out of PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
The transmission gear position display (located in the
shifting between these gears.
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUout of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Inter- TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® shift positions. Manual
lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control
(refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further informalever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
tion). Moving the shift lever into the AutoStick® (+/-)
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
position (below the Drive position) activates Autostick®
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
mode, providing manual shift control and displaying the
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
current gear in the instrument cluster.
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Four-Speed Or Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
Shift Lever
to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precauGear Ranges
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move
the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the
brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in the PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever. Do not leave the Key Fob in or
near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC
or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
REVERSE (R)
CAUTION!
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
DRIVE (D)
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downWARNING!
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characterispractices that limit your response to changing traffic tics under all normal operating conditions.
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
vehicle and have a collision.
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to only second gear (for four-speed transmission)
or third gear (for six-speed transmission). Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has
risen to a suitable level.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in second gear (for four-speed transmission) or third gear
(for six-speed transmission) regardless of which forward
gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the
vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service
without damaging the transmission.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the service is required.
following steps:
Overdrive Operation
1. Stop the vehicle.
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
controlled Overdrive (top gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
5. Restart the engine.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal • The engine coolant has reached an adequate temperaoperation.
ture.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- • The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has • The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Torque Converter Clutch
AUTOSTICK®
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control during
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
(usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Using the AutoStick® shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the AutoStick® position (below
the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side to side.
This allows the driver to manually select the transmission
gear being used. Moving the shift lever to the left (-)
triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The
current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift up or • You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except top
down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right
gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
second gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in
(+) or left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed
snow or icy conditions.
condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear
until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
described below.
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is enessary to prevent engine over-speed.
gaged.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
AutoStick® is engaged.
display the current gear.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
fault or overheat condition is detected.
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the To disengage AutoStick® mode, return the shift lever to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
vehicle is accelerated.
AutoStick® position at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive
(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Traction
Acceleration
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Shallow Standing Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/ Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
and Warnings before doing so.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
The standard power steering system will give you good
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
does not in any way damage the steering system.
steering capability if power assist is lost.
POWER STEERING
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
Power Steering Fluid Check
CAUTION!
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are system as the chemicals can damage your power
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici- steering components. Such damage is not covered by
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho- the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
rized dealer.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
WARNING!
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the correct fluid type.
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Parking Brake
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unattended
children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
WARNING! (Continued)
lever. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and
do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will
be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application and
greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle.
In addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the
hydraulic system, the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on
as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
5
WARNING!
• Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining
wear, and possible brake damage. You would not
have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light”
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance or vehicle stability during braking
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the
vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control.
You could have a collision. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up to
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)” under “Electronic Brake Control System” in this section for more
information.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ABS
cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an
ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
working properly. This self check occurs each time the
brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System (TCS), ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can inControl (ESC), Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Start clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
Assist (HSA). These systems work together to enhance debris, or panic stops.
both vehicle stability and control in various driving You also may experience the following when the brake
conditions.
system goes into Anti-lock:
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most • The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent • Brake pedal pulsations, and
wheel lock-up.
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
(Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
If both the Brake System Warning Light and the ABS
Light remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. ImmediThe Anti-Lock Brake Light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition switch ate repair to the ABS system is required.
is turned to the ON position and may stay on Brake Assist System (BAS)
for as long as four seconds.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
If the ABS Light remains on or comes on while driving, it capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system system detects an emergency braking situation by sensis not functioning and that service is required. However, ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
the conventional brake system will continue to operate applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on.
ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best
If the ABS Light is on, the brake system should be
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
must apply continuous braking pressure during the
Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS Light does not come on
stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
Anti-Lock Brake Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BASequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS functions similar to a
limited slip differential (BLD) and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for more information.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for over-steering and under-steering the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path.
The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Operating Modes
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the
vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons
as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional information.
Partial Off
The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch bank
above the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” button and the
“ESC OFF” Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the
ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” button
and the “ESC OFF” Indicator Light will turn off. This will
restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
OFF” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC OFF” button. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
ESC OFF Button
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
• When in “Partial Off ” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section) has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off ”mode, the engine power
reduction of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is
reduced.
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine NOTE:
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momenmalfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authowill be ON even if it was turned off previously.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
diagnosed and corrected.
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lowhen ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
that caused the ESC activation.
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer. TSC activates automatically once
the excessively swaying trailer is recognized. When TSC
is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power will be reduced,
and you will feel the brake being applied to individual
wheels in an attempt to stop the trailer from swaying.
WARNING!
• TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to ”Vehicle
Loading” and “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
• If TSC activates while towing a trailer, stop the
vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
accident or serious personal injury.
NOTE: The TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
the “Partial Off” mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backThe HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
WARNING!
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
the intended direction of travel.
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
HSA Activation Criteria
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
activate:
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
Towing With HSA
WARNING! (Continued)
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
NOTE: The HSA system may also be turned on and off if
the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
EXAMPLE:
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information Placard
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
spare tires.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Economy
(Continued)
• Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
door.
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
At least once a month:
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
temperature changes.
Tire Inflation Pressures
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
5
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Repair
All Season Tires — If Equipped
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary bemeets the following criteria:
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
handling of your vehicle.
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
additional information.
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immeaware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
driving conditions. For more information, contact a auservice description (Load Index and Speed Code).
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states proSnow Tires
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires checked before using these tire types.
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
Wheel — If Equipped
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
safety and handling of your vehicle.
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph tire rotation pattern.
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
first opportunity.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
WARNING!
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Inyour original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
first opportunity.
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
factors including, but not limited to:
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Driving style
Replacement Tires
• Tire pressure
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
• Distance driven
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manuhigher, and summer tires typically have a reduced facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivatread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main- lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
CAUTION!
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
• Install on Front Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance, P225/65R17 tire with a
Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile
traction device or equivalent is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
reversed.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Tire Rotation
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
mended cold placard pressure.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer
to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating”
for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven.
This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
NOTE:
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitorand maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
ing Telltale Light.”
failure or condition.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
while adjusting your tire pressure.
the tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
Base System
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure TIRE” message will be displayed and a chime will sound
readings to the receiver module.
when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active
road tires. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
displayed. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your
and to maintain the proper pressure.
vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recomThe TPMS consists of the following components:
mended cold placard pressure value, as shown in the
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
• Receiver Module
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
and “LOW TIRE” message will turn off. The vehicle may
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
Service TPMS Warning
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this
sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
• The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
ing limit, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn on and a “LOW
TPMS sensors.
TIRE” message will be displayed for a minimum of
five seconds upon the next ignition switch cycle. An
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed.
that affects radio wave signals.
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
housings.
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then and to maintain the proper pressure.
remain on solid.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the
TPMS will update automatically and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off, as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any
of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display a graphic showing the
pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values
in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
displayed.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a
different color in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value, as shown in
the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will change color
back to the original color, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
that affects radio wave signals.
also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
housings.
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
received.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
Service TPMS Warning
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
EVIC will still display a pressure value in a different
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be disdetected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
played.
message is then followed with a graphic display with
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
NOTE:
• The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure • For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moniwill flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnthen display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the following licenses:
TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the “Tire
MRXC4W4MA4
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off and the United States
graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value Canada
2546A-C4W4MA4
instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below
the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active FUEL REQUIREMENTS
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
This engine is designed to meet all emisto receive this information.
sions regulations and provide excellent
General Information
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
of
premium
gasoline
is not recommended, as it will not
following conditions:
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
engines.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
• Poor engine performance.
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may • Poor cold start and cold drivability.
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
E-85 perform the following:
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
engine controller memory.
and California reformulated gasoline.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
Materials Added To Fuel
exposure to E-85 fuel.
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
MMT In Gasoline
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is conditions and they would result in additional cost.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage fuel.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
5
E-85 Badge
E-85 Fuel Cap
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternating between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recomE-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
mended.
15% unleaded gasoline.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
• You do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling.
• You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
Fuel Requirements
NOTE:
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Parts
ADDING FUEL
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left
side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap has been designed for use with this
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door reinforcement.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
• Failure to follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound
is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn
off the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap • Month and year of manufacture
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic • Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further infor• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
mation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
WARNING!
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Overloading
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
GVWR.
front and rear GAWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or it is not over the GVWR.
rear GAWR.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
separately. It is important that you distribute the load Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
evenly over the front and rear axles.
the brakes operate.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension TRAILER TOWING
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
In this section you will find safety tips and information
GVWR.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
Loading
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty review this information to tow your load as efficiently
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items and safely as possible.
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before follow the requirements and recommendations in this
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
supported by the scale.
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Common Towing Definitions
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle CertificaThe GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem- information.
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control — Electronic
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System/Trailer Sway
Control (TSC)” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as swaying motions while traveling.
part of the load on your vehicle.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
Frontal Area
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Tongue Weight (TW)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. Weight DisA weight-distributing system works by applying levertribution hitched are recommended for loads in excess of
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
WARNING!
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent • An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
performance, and could result in a collision.
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and • Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
Weight-Distributing Hitch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:
2.4L/Automatic
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
3.6L/Automatic
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)
32 sq ft
(3.0 sq m)
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)
32 sq ft
(3.0 sq m)
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)
32 sq ft
(3.0 sq m)
Engine/Transmission
Frontal Area
22 sq ft
(2.0 sq m)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
which includes up to
5 persons & Luggage
2,500 lbs (1 134 kg)
which includes 1 to 2
persons & Luggage
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
which includes 3 to 4
persons & Luggage
1,500 lbs (680 kg)
which includes 5 to 7
persons & Luggage
Max. Tongue Wt.
100 lbs (45 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
* Except for AWD
models
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part
many trailer collisions.
of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety your bumper or trailer hitch.
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
NOTE:
• * For All Wheel Drive (AWD) models carrying 5 to 7
persons and luggage will exceed the rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) and therefore should not be
attempted.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
Consider the following items when computing the Towing Requirements
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive• The tongue weight of the trailer.
train components the following guidelines are recom• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment mended:
put in or on your vehicle.
CAUTION!
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or authorized dealer-installed
options must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information”
placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule”. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
– Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
– Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
– When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replaceTowing Requirements — Tires
ment procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
– Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
and GAWR limits.
spare tire.
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
– Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and
cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you
need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of
you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
5
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Four-Pin Connector
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the
Autostick® shift control to manually select a lower gear.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the transmission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
or frequent trailer towing”. Refer to the “Maintenance AutoStick®
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
• When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
NOTE: Check the four-speed automatic transmission
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if
fluid level before towing. The six-speed transmission
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or
does not require a fluid level check before towing. If,
“2” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
however, you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, see your authorized dealer immediately for
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
assistance.
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necesElectronic Speed Control — If Equipped
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
conditions allow.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Highway Driving
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- Reduce speed.
heating, take the following actions:
Air Conditioning
City Driving
Turn off temporarily.
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheel OFF the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
FWD Models
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AWD Models
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models (Automatic Transmission Models Only)
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmis- or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
sion in PARK.
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind an4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following other vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ 2.4L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Spare Tire Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
514 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Without The Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . . . . . .542
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 515
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel switch bank, above the climate controls. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
an impending overheat condition:
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
to High. This allows the heater core to act as a
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
from the engine cooling system.
may wear down your battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
516 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2.4L Engine — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the A/C turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine OFF immediately, and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
On hot days the engine oil temperature may become too
hot during sustained high-speed driving or if towing a
trailer up long grades. If this happens, a HOTOIL message will flash in the odometer and the vehicle speed will
be reduced to 48 mph (77 km/h) maximum until the
engine oil temperature is reduced.
NOTE: The maximum vehicle speed is reduced to
48 mph (77 km/h), you may reduce vehicle speed further
as needed. Once the engine oil temperature is reduced,
you may continue to drive normally
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 517
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m)
M12 x 1.25
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
19 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
6
Wheel Mounting Surface
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
518 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 519
Jack Location
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
The jack and jack-handle are stowed underneath a cover
in the rear storage bin in the cargo area.
6
Jack Storage Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
520 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Set the parking brake.
Spare Tire Location
The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the 4. Place the shift lever in PARK.
vehicle and is held in place by means of a cable winch
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
mechanism.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
Preparations For Jacking
wheel diagonally opposite of the
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
jacking position. For example, if
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
changing the right front tire, block
areas.
the left rear wheel.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 521
Spare Tire Removal
NOTE: On seven-passenger models, fold the third-row
passenger seats flat. This will provide more space when
accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch
mechanism.
1. Remove the jack-handle components 1, 2 and 3 from
storage and assemble them.
6
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
1 — Spare Tire Jack Handle
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
522 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the 3. Pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle and
small ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at
raise it upright so the tire’s tread is on the ground.
the end of component 3. This will lock these components
4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and
together. Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel
remove it from the center of the wheel.
nut socket at the end of component 1 faces upward when
seated on component 2. This will make it easier to rotate
the assembly when operating the winch mechanism.
2. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive nut
located in the jack storage area. Rotate the jack-handle
assembly counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull the
spare tire out from underneath the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and it can damage the
winch.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Spare Tire Retainer
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 523
Spare Tire Stowage
Jacking Instructions
NOTE: Refer to “Spare Tire Removal” for information on
assembling the winch tools.
1. Place the spare tire near to the winch cable. Hold the
spare upright so that the tire’s tread is on the ground
and the valve stem is at the top of the wheel facing
away from the rear of the vehicle.
2. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and drop
it through the center of the wheel. Then place the spare
tire with the cable and retainer underneath the vehicle.
3. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive
nut. Rotate the jack-handle assembly clockwise to
raise the spare tire into the storage area. Continue to
rotate the jack-handle assembly until you hear the
winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be over
tightened. Push against the tire several times to be
sure it is held securely in place.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
6
524 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 525
3. Place the jack in the notches underneath the lift area
that is closest to the flat tire. Center the jack saddle
between the drain flute formations on the sill flange.
Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack
saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
6
Jacking Locations
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and jack-handle from
stowage.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Front Jacking Location
526 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Front Jack Engaged With Jack Handle
Rear Jacking Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 527
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts. For vehicles so equipped,
remove the wheel cover from the wheel by hand. Do
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
6
WARNING!
Rear Jack Engaged With Jack Handle
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise
with the jack handle. Raise the vehicle until the tire To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
just clears the road surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift edges.
provides maximum stability.
6. Install the spare tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
528 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE:
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires — General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
7. Install the wheel nuts with the cone-shaped end of the
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Mounting Spare Tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 529
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter- 11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Do not
clockwise with the jack handle.
stow the deflated tire in the spare tire stowage
location. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
replaced as soon as possible.
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until 12. To stow the winch cable and retainer, fit the aseach nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug
sembled jack-handle over the winch drive nut. Rotate
nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this secthe jack-handle assembly clockwise until you hear
tion. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
over tightened.
dealer or service station.
13. Stow the jack-handle and jack. Remove the wheel
10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
blocks from the vehicle and release the park brake.
14. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Adjust the
tire pressure as required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
530 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 531
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the 6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug
nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this sec4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
tion. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
lug nuts.
dealer or service station.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack 2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
handle counterclockwise.
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
532 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
handle counterclockwise.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
WARNING!
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For proper lug nut
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
torque refer to Torque Specifications in this secton. If
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or service station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left
Remote Battery Posts
front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash 1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap)
shield. To allow jump-starting, there are remote battery 2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
posts located on the left side of the engine compartment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
534 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking
tab and pull upward on the cover.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 535
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
battery.
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle,
in the reverse sequence:
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+)
battery post of the discharged vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 537
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator pedal. Use
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine
to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least
one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This
will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle.
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle
has been freed, press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore
⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
3. Open the center console and remove the shift lever
override access cover (located in the front lower right
corner of the console storage bin).
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar small tool into the 6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
access port, and push and hold the override release
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
lever forward.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or Dolly
Tow
Flatbed
Wheel OFF the Ground
NONE
Rear
Front
ALL
FWD MODELS
IF transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h)
max speed
• 15 miles (24 km)
max distance
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST METHOD
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
6
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Shift Lever
Override” in this section for instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, not in the LOCK/OFF position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541
Without The Key Fob
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF position. Flatbed towing is
the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed
towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing equipment may be used. Rear towing (with the front wheels on
the ground) is not allowed, as transmission damage will
occur. If rear towing is the only alternative, the front
wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper towing
equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis- dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
sion is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all raised).
four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
CAUTION!
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .547
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .547
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .558
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573 䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
▫ Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD Models
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ Front Low/High Beam Headlamp, Turn
Signal/Park Lamp, And Side Marker Lamp . .596
▫ Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD Models
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
▫ Cleaning The Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
▫ Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center) . .590
▫ Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp . . . . . . . .598
▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . .603
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
8 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (4–Speed Only)
9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Engine Oil Dipstick
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5
6
7
8
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound
is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn
off the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
PROGRAMS
do the following:
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
not crank or start the engine.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- start this test over.
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
of a normal bulb check.
system is ready for testing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
happen:
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the REPLACEMENT PARTS
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainterecently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
you may need to do nothing more than drive your Limited Warranty.
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking engine oil level
when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect
reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. Either the range markings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a
crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the
range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding
1.0 qt (1.0 l) of oil when the reading is at the low end of
the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end
of the range marking.
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Selection
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
months, whichever occurs first.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil® Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating
or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem- temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Comthe engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Com- partment” illustration in this section.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 2.4L Engine
partment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
information.
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic Engine Oils
Engine Oil Filter
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom- The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom- at every engine oil change.
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
Engine Oil Filter Selection
are followed.
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
Materials Added To Engine Oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi- of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. filter and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, maintenance intervals.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE:The battery is stored in a compartment that is
located behind the left front fender and is accessible
through the wheel well. The wheel and tire assemble
do not need to be removed to access the compartment.
Remote battery terminals are located in the engine
compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “JumpStarting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be right and remove the access panel from the inner fender
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air shield.
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
Air Conditioner Maintenance
WARNING! (Continued)
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
WARNING!
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- operating or personal injury may result.
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
service be performed by authorized dealer or other the glove box. Perform the following steps to replace the
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. filter:
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system 1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
2. Push the retaining tab on each side of the glove box
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
inward while gently pulling the glove box door outward until both tabs clear the door opening in the
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
instrument panel.
maintenance intervals.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
Glove Box Removal
A/C Air Filter Replacement
3. Pivot the glove box downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
CAUTION!
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
to install the filter properly will result in the need to should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
replace it more often.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
7. Reinstall the glove box door. Make sure that the hinges components to ensure proper function. When performing
are seated fully as you raise the door. Otherwise, the other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
door latch will not align properly.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the 1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulaliftgate glass.
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions 1 — Wiper Arm
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces- 2 — Pivot Cap
sary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
containers.
place.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer
Adding Washer Fluid
fluid when the message “LoWASH” appears in the
The windshield washer and the rear window washer instrument cluster.
share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
WARNING!
fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator Commercially available windshield washer solvents
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
flush out the residual water.
the washer solution.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust System
WARNING!
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
Coolant Checks
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS-12106).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubneeded to be added to the system please contact your
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
local authorized dealer.
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Coolant
CAUTION! (Continued)
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material StanYour vehicle has been built with an improved engine
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concencoolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To pre- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionvent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
your vehicle.
engine cooling system.
Adding Coolant
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
3.6L Engine — The level of the coolant in the pressurized
coolant bottle should be between the “COLD” and
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
“FULL” range on the bottle when the engine is cold.
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani- no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antiengine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in freeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When
spills immediately.
additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
Coolant Level
bottle. Do not overfill.
2.4L Engine — The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine idling and warm to normal
operating temperature, the level of the coolant in the
bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines,
shown on the bottle.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106)
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporyour engine which contains aluminum components.
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
Points To Remember
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
system components should be inspected periodically. if the “Brake Warning Light” indicates system failure.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when permaintenance intervals.
forming underhood services.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to
the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of
special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check — Four-Speed Automatic
Transmission
Use the following procedure to check the transmission
fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60
seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of
this procedure.
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position (allowing time for the transmission to fully engage in each position), ending with the transmission in
PARK.
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to prevent dirt
from entering the transmission.
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or cold. You can also read the transmission fluid
temperature using the Vehicle Information display in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
the instrument cluster. Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your
Instrument Panel⬙ for further information. Hot fluid is
approximately 180°F (82°C), which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is driven at least
15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably
between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a temperature
of approximately 80°F (27°C).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert it until seated.
Then, remove the dipstick and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid
if the actual level is at or above the hole.
• If the fluid is hot, the fluid level should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper two holes in the dipstick).
• If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two COLD (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 80°F (27°C). If the fluid
level is correctly established at 80°F (27°C), it should be
between the HOT (upper) reference holes when the
transmission reaches 180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to
check the level at the normal operating temperature.
If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick
tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. After
adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait
at least two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the
transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
8. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
7
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dirt and water in the transmission can cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing
fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is re-seated
properly.
Fluid Level Check — Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is provided. Your
authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level
using a special service dipstick. If you notice fluid leakage
or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked.
Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can
cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD Models Only
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD Models Only
Lubricant Selection
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain- to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing the
fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between
the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below the fill
hole.
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing the
fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between
the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below the fill
hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
maintenance intervals.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
CAUTION!
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint
and decals.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
packaged and sealed.
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manThe instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
ner:
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting use protectants or other products, which may cause
with a clean, dry towel.
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Cleaning Interior Trim
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
clean vinyl upholstery.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
WARNING!
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Glass Surfaces
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear wincleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
rag.
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
Seat Belt Maintenance
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
directly on the mirror.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the FUSES
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Cleaning The Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent.
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
WARNING! (Continued)
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
F102
20 Amp
Yellow
F103
20 Amp
Yellow
F105
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located on the passenger side
under the instrument panel.
Cavity
F100
F101
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
Description
110V AC Inverter –
If Equipped
Interior Lights
F106
F107
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Cigar Lighter in
Instrument Panel/
Left Rear Power
Outlet
Power Outlet in
Console Bin/Power
Outlet in Rear of
Console
Heated Seats – If
Equipped
Rear Power Outlet
Rear Camera – If
Equipped
7
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
F108
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
F109
F110
F112
F114
F115
F116
MiniFuse
30 Amp
Pink
Description
Cavity
Instrument Panel
F117
Climate Control/
HVAC
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Spare
F118
F119
F120
Rear HVAC
Blower/Motor
Rear Wiper Motor
F121
Rear Defroster
(EBL)
F123
F122
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Heated Mirrors
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Steering Column
Control Module
All Wheel Drive –
If Equipped
Wireless Ignition
Node
Driver Door
Module
Passenger Door
Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
Cavity
F124
F125
F126
F127
F128
F129
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Cavity
Mirrors
F130
Steering Column
Control Module
Audio Amplifier
F131
Trailer Tow – If
Equipped
Radio
F132
F133
Video/DVD – If
Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Climate Control/
Instrument Panel
Passenger
Assistance/Hands
Free System – If
Equipped
Tire Pressure
Module
Spare
7
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
The power distribution center is located in the engine
compartment.
Cavity
F101
F102
F103
F105
F106
Power Distribution Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
60 Amp
Yellow
60 Amp
Yellow
60 Amp
Yellow
60 Amp
Yellow
MiniFuse
Description
Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
Ignition Run Relay
Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
Run/Accessory
Relays
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
Cavity
F139
F140
F141
F142
F143
F144
F145
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
Climate Control
System Blower
Power Locks
F146
Anti-Lock Brake
System
Glow Plugs – If
Equipped
Exterior Lights 1
F148
Exterior Lights 2
F151
To Body Computer
– Lamp
F152
F147
F149
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
F150
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MiniFuse
Description
Spare
Spare
Radiator Fan Motor
Starter Solenoid
25 Amp
Natural
30 Amp
Pink
25 Amp
Natural
Powertrain Control
Modules
Headlamp Washer
Motor – If Equipped
Diesel Fuel Heater –
If Equipped
7
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F153
F156
F157
F158
F159
F160
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Cavity
Fuel Pump
F161
Brake/Electronic
Stability Control
Module
Power Transfer Unit
Module –
If Equipped
Active Hood Module – If Equipped
Spare
F162
Interior Lights
F163
F164
F165
F166
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Red/
20 Amp
Lt. Blue
50 Amp
Red
Description
Horn
Cabin Heater #1/
Vacuum Pump –
If Equipped
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Cabin Heater #2 –
If Equipped
Powertrain Auto
Shutdown
Powertrain Shutdown
Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
F167
30 Amp
Green
10 Amp
Red
F168
F169
F170
F172
F173
MiniFuse
40 Amp
Green
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Cavity
Powertrain Shutdown
Air Conditioner
Clutch
Emissions – Partial
Zero Emissions
Vehicle Motor
Emissions – Partial
Zero Emissions
Vehicle Actuators
Spare
F174
F175
F176
F177
F178
F179
Anti Lock Brake
Valves
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Green
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
Description
Siren – If Equipped
Spare
Powertrain Control
Modules
All Wheel Drive
Module – If
Equipped
Sunroof – If
Equipped
Battery Sensor
7
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F181
F182
F184
Cartridge
Fuse
100
Amp
Blue
50 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Pink
REPLACEMENT BULBS
MiniFuse
Description
Interior Bulbs
Electrohydraulic
Steering (EHPS) – If
Equipped
Cabin Heater #3 – If
Equipped
Front Wiper Motor
Bulb Number
578
Courtesy/Reading
Lamps (Incandescent)
Courtesy/Reading
LED (Serviced at
Lamps (Optional LED)
Authorized Dealer)
Glove Box Lamp
194
Cargo Lamp
579
Optional Door Map
LED (Serviced at
Pocket/Cupholder
Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam Headlamp
High Beam Headlamp
Front Park/Turn Signal
Side Marker Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
License Lamp
Exterior Bulbs – Rear (LED Version)
Bulb Number
9006
9005
3757AK
168
PSX24W
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
168
Rear Tail/Stop Lamp
Rear Tail (Liftgate) Lamp
Rear Turn Signal Lamp
Backup Lamp
Bulb Number
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
WY21W
W21W
Exterior Bulbs – Rear (Bulb Version)
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn
Signal Lamp
Rear Tail (Liftgate) Lamp
Backup Lamp
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Bulb Number
P27/7W
P27/7W
P27/7W
7
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Front Low/High Beam Headlamp, Turn
Signal/Park Lamp, And Side Marker Lamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner
filter housing and position the Totally Integrated Power 1 — Front Turn Signal/Park Lamp Bulb
Module (TIPM) aside to replace certain lamps in the left 2 — Side Marker Lamp Bulb
3 — Low Beam Headlamp Bulb
headlamp housing.
4 — High Beam Headlamp Bulb
2. Rotate the applicable bulb and connector assembly ¼
turn counterclockwise and remove the assembly from 3. Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector and
the headlamp housing.
then connect the replacement bulb.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
2. Remove the electrical connector from the fog lamp
housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate it ¼ turn clockwise to
lock it in place.
Front Fog Lamp
NOTE: Turn the steering wheel to the right if replacing
the left front fog lamp or to the left if replacing the right
front fog lamp to allow for easier access to the front of the
Front Fog Lamp Electrical Connector
wheel well.
3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
pull straight out from the fog lamp.
1. Remove the fasteners retaining the front lower wheel
well access panel and remove the access panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Changing The Rear Turn Signal Lamp
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two fasteners from the inboard side of the
tail lamp housing.
4. Install the replacement bulb and connector assembly
straight into the fog lamp until it locks into place.
5. Reinstall the front lower wheel well access panel and
fasteners.
Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp
The tail lamps are a two-piece design. The tail/stop/rear
turn signal lamps are located in the rear corner body
panels. The tail and backup lamps are located in the
liftgate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Inboard Tail Lamp Housing Fasteners
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool) Changing The Backup Lamp
between the body panel and the outboard side of the
1. Open the liftgate.
tail lamp housing with one hand and grasp the flange
on the inboard side of the tail lamp housing with the 2. Remove the two fasteners retaining the tail lamp
housing to the liftgate from the inboard face of the
other hand. Use the trim stick and hand pressure
liftgate.
together to disengage the tail lamp housing from the
vehicle.
4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector ¼ turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the tail lamp
housing.
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
7
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the tail
lamp housing and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and fasteners.
Tail Lamp Housing Retainers
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool) 4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector ¼ turn
between the tail lamp housing and the liftgate. Use the
counterclockwise and remove it from the housing.
trim stick and hand pressure together to disengage the
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
tail lamp housing from the liftgate.
the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
housing and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise to
lock it in place.
7. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and fasteners.
Tail Gate Lamp
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool between the end of the
lens with the locking tab and the surrounding housing
1. Push the small locking tab sticking out of the end of
and then pivot the tool to separate the lens from the
the lens toward the side of the vehicle and hold it in
housing.
that position.
3. Hold the lens with one hand and rotate the bulb’s
electrical connector ¼ turn counterclockwise with the
other hand and then separate the bulb and connector
assembly from the lens.
License Plate Lamp
4. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
5. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the lens
and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in
place.
License Lamp
6. Insert the end of the lens without the locking tab into
the housing on the liftgate and then push the opposite
end of the lens into the housing, making sure it locks
in the housing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
All-Wheel Drive Models
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine and Single or Dual-Zone Climate Control System
(MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
2.4L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR®
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
U.S.
Metric
20.5 Gallons
21 Gallons
77.6 Liters
79.8 Liters
4.5 Quarts
6 Quarts
4.26 Liters
5.6 Liters
10.7 Quarts
10.1 Liters
11.6 Quarts
11.0 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
3.6L Engine and Single or Dual-Zone Climate Control System
(MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
3.6L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR®
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
13.1 Quarts
Metric
12.4 Liters
14.5 Quarts
13.7 Liters
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as
MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler
cap for correct SAE grade.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as
MOPAR, Pennzoil® and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend MOPAR® ATF+4® fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear Lubricant 75W-90.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear Lubricant 75W-90.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid + 4, or
MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 N
C
E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
608 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled maintenance.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indi- your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring
cator message will illuminate. This means that service is to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Information
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in “Understanding
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambi- Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster
ent temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding
the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Severe Duty All Models
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis- Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound, operated in a dusty and off road environment. This type of
vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 609 M
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission (2.4L
engine only) and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
8
Maintenance Chart
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
30,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
48,000
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
20,000
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
610 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
32,000
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs
(2.4L Engine). **
Replace spark plugs
(3.6L Engine). **
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 611 M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your
vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
Replace rear drive assembly
(RDA) fluid.
Replace power transfer unit
(PTU) fluid.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
20,000
M 612 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years: 2
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 613 M
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .617
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .621
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .618
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .618
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .622
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
616 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 617
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
618 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 423–6343
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 619
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
620 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 621
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom- or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administramended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other informaoperating at its best.
tion about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
MOPAR® PARTS
In Canada
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
roadsafety/
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
622 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 623
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
Traction Grades
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforAll passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety mance.
requirements in addition to these grades.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
624 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance,
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
626 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .554
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 627
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .269
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Back-Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .25
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Bluetooth®
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone . . . . . .
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. . .156
. . .143
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.129
.560
.456
.441
.439
.605
.434
.437
.437
.438
.573
.573
10
628 INDEX
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . .106 Cargo Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Rollaway Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Tri-Fold Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .302
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 629
Child Restraints
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .97
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .90
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .372
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.278
.253
.619
.570
.566
.569
.602
.567
.571
.567
.571
.572
.570
.570
.568
.580
.275
.617
10
630 INDEX
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Door Locks
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .321
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . . .350
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . .
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.488
.269
.269
.121
.439
.438
.441
.442
.442
INDEX 631
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . .
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .239
. . . . .443
. . . . .251
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.537
.515
.518
.532
.515
.539
.548
.106
.554
.417
.106
.551
.545
.546
.567
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
632 INDEX
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Fabric Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554 Fluid Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Fluid Level Checks
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Flashers
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .603
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 633
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Light Service . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . .
Conserving . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . .
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .
Filler Door (Gas Cap)
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.228
.597
.214
.537
.483
.492
.486
.484
.321
.484
.309
.309
.483
.309
.317
.486
.484
.483
.483
Saver Mode . . . . .
Specifications . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . .
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . .
Fueling . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Optimizer . . . . .
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . .
Fuel System Caution .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel)
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . .
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.321
.603
.602
.488
.492
.321
.321
.493
.586
. . . . . . . . . . . .256
. . . . . . . . . . . .492
. . . . . . . . . . . .484
. . . . . . . . . . . .321
. . . . . . . . . . . .484
. . . . . . . . . . . .310
. . . . . . . . . . . .309
10
634 INDEX
Speedometer . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Select Lever Override .
General Information . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.309
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . .
.302
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.421
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.538
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.147
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.585
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.495
.495 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.495 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .
.431 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.515 Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.226 Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.596 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.584
.227
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.596
.230
.227
.226
.230
.225
.227
.209
.123
.202
.417
.230
.448
. . .500
. . .278
. . .275
INDEX 635
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 iPod®/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Key Fob
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
636 INDEX
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Latch Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .446
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 637
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .302
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .231
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .302
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .302
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
638 INDEX
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Transaxle
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.555
.550
.302
.622
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.579
.579
.231
.596
.573
.484
.323
.119
.119
.121
.121
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 639
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . .
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . .
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . .
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . .
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.305
.305
.551
.602
.320
.551
.551
.554
.554
.554
.552
.554
.552
.554
.553
.554
.547
.256
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System). . . . . .219
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Phone (Pairing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .456
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
640 INDEX
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .269
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .22
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .570
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Rear Drive Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Rear Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Reclining Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 641
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .373
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Reverse Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
642 INDEX
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Seat Belt
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .56
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Reclining Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .302
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 643
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .373
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .65
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
644 INDEX
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .456
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.463
.462
.518
.469
.456
.474
.305
.623
.463
.469
.473
.450
.451
.465
.520
.468
.505
.468
.450
INDEX 645
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . .
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . .
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.502
.223
.496
.510
.539
.501
.510
.501
.510
.430
.442
.447
.496
.510
.500
.503
.508
.502
.507
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Transaxle
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .256
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .22
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Uconnect®
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
646 INDEX
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Screen Activated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Uconnect® phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .372
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .18
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .302
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 647
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Wiper, Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency
signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must
be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must
be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the
battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal
adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection
should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or
the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting
antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy
or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed
away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully
shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a
low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal
may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference
between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2014 Journey
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
14JC49-126-AD
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Fourth
Edition
Rev. 1
Fourth
Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Journey
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement